Home

Yamaha S30 Musical Instrument User Manual

1. __ 75 Element Piteh __ 75 PCH Tune Pitch Tune 75 PEG VelSens PEG Velocity Sensitivity _ 76 PEG Aine _ _ X _ _ _ _ _ ___ 76 PEG Level 76 PEG Release Y 76 PCH Scale Pitch Scale __ 77 Element Filter __ 78 FLT Type Filter Type _ 78 FLT HPF High Pass Filter 80 FLT Sens Filter Sensitivity __ 80 FEG VelSens FEG Velocity Sensitivity __ 80 FEG Time Y 8 FEG Level _ _ 81 FEG Release 8 FLT KeyFlw Filter Key Follow _ 81 FLT Scale Filter Scale Break Point _ 82 FLT Scale Filter Scale Offset _ 82 Element Amplitude __ __ 83 AEG VelSens AEG Velocity Sensitivity _ 83 AEG Time _HAKIT Tm _ 8 AEG Leve l ____Y _ 8 AEG Release __ 83 AMP KeyFlw AMP Key Follow __ 84 AMP Scale AMP S
2. Negative value Speed of AEG level change Lower range Center Basic Pitch Higher range AMP Scale AMP Scaling Break Point You can set four Amplitude Scaling Break Points for each Element Amplitude Scaling controls the amplitude according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard There are four Break Points used to divide and assign different settings across the keyboard The Levels Offsets at each of Break Point are set in the AMP Scale screen Details about Amplitude Scaling are given later in the section Amplitude Scaling Settings The Levels of the Elements themselves are set in the OSC Out screen Page 74 HMPEScales BFI BP BPS BP4 EL1I234 L z CS LHS G5 E BP1 BP2 BP3 BP4 Break Point1 2 3 4 Set the Break Points for each Element BP1 to BP4 will automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard Li Settings BP1 to BP4 C 2 G8 You can also set each Break Point by pressing the respective note on the keyboard while holding down the SHIFT key AMP Scale AMP Scaling Offset HMPEScales0rstl Ofst2 Ofst3 Ofst4 EL1i234 127 128 E Ofst1 Ofst2 Ofst3 Ofst4 Offset 1 2 3 4 Set the Amplitude Scaling Offset Levels These Offsets are used by the Break Points BP1 BP2 BP3 BP4 Details about Amplitude Scaling are given later in the section Amplitude Scaling Settings Li Settings Ofst1 to Ofst4 128 0 127 Amplitude Scaling Settings B
3. Hold Attack Decay1 i Decay2 Release Time Time Time Time Time Details about FEG parameters are given on Page 80 48 AMP Amplitude and AEG Amplitude EG Screens Set the volume of each Element after the OSC Oscillator PITCH and FILT Filter parameters have been applied and also the final overall volume of the signal sent to the outputs The signal of each Element is sent at the specified volume to the next Effect Unit Also by setting the AEG Amplitude Envelope Generator you can control how the volume changes over time Effect The final volume for all Elements is set in the Volume Vol parameter of the QED screen in Common Edit e Amplitude EG Envelope Generator Using the AEG you can control the transition in volume from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the point at which it is released As illustrated below the Amplitude Envelope consists of five Time transition speed parameters and five Level parameters for the amount of filtering When you press a note on the keyboard the volume will change according to these envelope settings Furthermore different AEG parameters can be set for each Element HEGET ime Attack Decayl Decauz EL1234 127 Izr Izr Attack Decayi Sustain Release Level Level Level Key off Level Level 0 Attack gt Decay1 Decay2 Release Time Time Time Time Details about AEG parameters are given on Page 83 LFO Low Freque
4. 6 Card Mode Page 135 Press the CARD key its LED will light to enter Card Mode To exit to another Mode simply press the respective key for that Mode Zaue Tyre File A Cursor E 7 Card all HEWFILE S20 7 Sequence Play Mode Page 125 Press the SEO PLAY key its LED will light to enter Sequence Play Mode To exit to another Mode simply press the respective key for that Mode SEG il Pert Chaint 5 126 Mess 861 INT 126 When MIDI system exclusive messages are received from an external MIDI device the LED for the currently selected Play Mode VOICE or PERFORM will blink Store Modes Pages 101 124 When in each Play or Edit Mode you can swiftly switch to each respective Store Mode by simply pressing the STORE key To exit to another Mode simply press the respective key for that Mode or press the EXIT key to return to Play Mode UCE S41 Generation a J3 Store IHT 61 AG1 gt You can switch between screens using the PAGE knob and pressing SHIFT PROGRAM PART EXIT and ENTER keys PAGE Knob Usually there are several screens and sub screens in each Mode Use the PAGE knob to switch between screens UCE Sech PREL Memory SHIFT PAGE Previous screen Next screen As shown below the indicator is displayed to the left of the screen if there are more screens before and after that which you are currently viewing At the first in a series of
5. PRE1 PRE 2 INT EXT BOL DRUM DRUM nna naaeawe wa CT JL ICICICICICI LI e Press the MEMORY PRE2 key while holding down the MEMORY PRE1 key or vice versa to select the Preset PRE Memory of the Drum Voice Then use the INC YES or DEC NO keys to select the Drum Voice E E E L DEC NO INC YES e Press the MEMORY PRE2 key while holding down the MEMORY PRE1 key or vice versa to select the Preset PRE Memory of the Drum Voice Then use the DATA knob to select the Drum Voice PRE1 PRE 2 INT EXT PLG DRUM DRUM 17 WCE Playa PRE 861 AB1 CS4 Generation EG iLow G EQ Mid G EQHi G FLT Fez HFF DATA O00000 Once you have selected one Drum Voice you can easily switch to another by simply using PROGRAM keys 1 to 8 the INC YES and DEC NO keys or the DATA knob SHIFT PAGE A re PART ELEMENT ing User Drums INT DR1 2 and EXT DR1 2 e Press the MEMORY EXT key while holding down the MEMORY INT key or vice versa to select the Internal External INT EXT Memory of the User Drum Voice Then press PROGRAM keys 1 to 4 to select respectively User Drum Voice INT DR1 Internal Drum 1 INT DR2 Internal Drum 2 EXT DR1 External Drum 1 and EXT DR2 External Drum 2 User Drum Voices on external memory must be loaded from Memory Card Voice Mode spow DN uv T DRUM B B M MAL JL UUU AAA L e Press the MEMORY EXT key while holding down the MEMORY
6. Tst Screen PFM Play Performance Play 1 2 3 PFM Flas IHT i 8tH16 HC Ff Init Ferf J A 4 B c 1 2 PART ELEMENT 1 Screen Title This shows that you are currently in Performance Play Mode The Memory Performance Program Number 001 to 128 and Bank A to H Program Number 1 to 16 are shown for the selected Performance For example INT 128 H16 shows that the Memory is Internal the Performance Program Number is 128 the Bank is H and the Bank s Program Number is 16 SHIFT PAGE DATA Memory Performance Program Number Internal Memories are shown as INT and External Memories are shown as EXT Each Voice within a Memory is assigned a Performance Program Number of 001 to 128 Details about Performance Memories are given on Page 24 Bank Program Number Performance Program Numbers 001 to 128 are related to Banks A to H and Program Numbers 1 to 16 for the Bank as explained below For example you can select a Performance either directly by its Performance Program Number or by using a combination of Bank and Program keys 4 Knob Parameter Display Program This shows the function Parameter value assigned to each knob A to C and 1 2 Performance Number 001 002 Program Performance Number Number 1 065 066 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024
7. e The S30 can read CS6x CS6R S80 Plug in Voice data The Plug in Voices for the PLG150 AN DX PF VL Plug in Boards are in MIDI File format Use Card Filer to send voice data to Memory Card then start playback on the sequencer to read the data into PLG Memory Of the two types of file PLG1 and PLG2 play back the PLG2 type 147 Appendix Initial touch Aftertouch TONE GENERATION SYSTEN E T VOICE Number of Voice Normal voices 256 Presets 128 Internals Users 128 Externals Memory Cards Drum voices 8 presets 2 Internals Users 2 Externals Memory Cards Plug in voices 64 Plug in Board if installed Wave ROM 24 MByte PERFORMANCE Multi Timbres 17 16 Voice Parts Plug in Part 128 Internals 64 Externals Insertion 24 Insertion 1 92 Insertion 2 24 Insertion for Plug in Voices MasterEa 4 SEQUENCE PLAY Format SMF Format 0 Direct Play only Sequence Chain Load Save 100 Steps 100 Songs Card File Type All Data All Voice Plug in Sequence Chain SMF Functions Save Load Rename Delete Make Directory Format CONTROLS Volume Slider 4 Control Sliders Pitch Bend Modulation Shift Page Knob A B C 1 2 Data Effect Bypass Master Keyboard Exit Enter Dec No Inc Yes 7 Mode Keys Sequence Play Sequence PLAY STOP 5 Memory Keys Quick Access 8 Bank Keys 16 Program Part Keys STANDBY ON Host Select CONNECTORS amp TERMINALS MIDI In Out
8. 01 12 Pure major C B This tuning is designed so that most of the intervals especially the major third and perfect fifth in the major scale are pure This means that other intervals will be correspondingly out of tune You need to specify the key C B you will be playing in 13 24 Pure minor A G The same as Pure Major but designed for the minor scale 25 Werckmeister Andreas Werckmeister a contemporary of Bach designed this tuning so that keyboard instruments could be played in any key Each key has a unique character Johan Philipp Kirnberber was also concerned with tempering the scale to allow performances in any key Vallotti amp Young Francescantonio Vallotti and Thomas Young both mid 1700s divised this adjustment to the Pythagorean tuning in which the first six fifths are lower by the same amount is the normal equal tempered scale up 50 cents Forty eight equally spaced notes per octave Play forty eight notes to move one octave 1 8 tone Usually observed in the Indian music white keys C B only ap ne _ shifted 1 4 tone Twenty four equally spaced notes per octave Play twenty four notes to move one octave 66 Common Quick Edit Various parameters control the sonic properties of the Voice There are four screens OED Level Quick Edit Level OED EffectCtrl Quick Edit Effect OED Filter Quick Edit Filter OED EG Quick Edit Envelope Generator QED Level Quick Ed
9. vUse Knob C to select the File Number When you press the ENTER key the following will be displayed depending on the selected File Type If you set the source Performance Number to all the target Performance Number will also be set to all 138 voice Load gt Card CPt bok soi ERE Voice Memory of Voice Memory to file to be loaded source which file will be loaded target Voice Number of file to be loaded source Voice Number to which file will be loaded target Li Settings Source Voice Memory INT Internal EXT External PLG1 Plug in 1 PLG Plug in Only select PLG1 for Voice data Plug in Voices that has been created on an S80 To read PLG1 of an S80 select PLG1 To select PLG2 of an S80 select PLG Source Voice Number all all Voices 1 128 DR1 2 INT EXT 1 64 PLG1 PLG Target Voice Memory INT Internal EXT External PLG Plug in Target Voice Number all all Voices 1 128 DR1 2 INT EXT 1 64 PLG If you select PLG as the source or target Voice Memory the target or source Voice Memory will also be set to PLG1 PLG If you set the source Voice Number to all the target Voice Number will also be set to all Press the INC YES key to load the file The message Completed will be displayed after it has been loaded and you will be returned to the previous screen The load operation will be cancel
10. 127 2 Velocity offset relative Offset 64 _ 7 Offset added 10 Actual velocity _ 7 Offset added 10 Volume Demo Playback Several demo songs are supplied with this synthesizer You can play them back as follows Make sure synthesizer is ready for playback Details are given in the section Before Use on Page 9 At the SEQ Demo screen any data in the instrument s internal memory System Internal Voices or the like will be overwritten by the data for the demo song Important data should be saved to Memory Card Page 137 beforehand Press the SEQ PLAY key to enter Sequence Play Mode You will see the following screen SEQ Demos Are you sure CYESIJI CHOI gt gt Systems Intloice will be changed There are two screens in Sequence Play Mode Use the PAGE knob to switch to the screen shown above Press the INC YES key to enter the SEO Demo screen Demo song name SEQ Demo Sonma DEMOSOHMG 1 P Bei 126 Demo song number Playback tempo To cancel demo playback press the DEC NO key Press the PLAY STOP key to start playback of the song Press the PLAY STOP key again to stop playback At the end of the song playback is automatically looped back to the beginning You can change the playback tempo using the Knob C To use the song s original tempo select a tempo value of COR RR 99 Details about Sequence Play Mode and demo playback from Memory Card
11. B C 1 and 2 can be used as real time controllers Knobs A B and C are assigned to control the equalizer gain of respectively EQ Low EQ Mid and EQ Hi With Knobs 1 and 2 you are free to assign different parameters per Voice WCE Play PREL 1298 H162 CP GeandPianol EG Low EQ Mid E Hi Cutoff RevTime SHIFT PAGE A B c 1 2 PART ELEMENT DATA If you turn any knob clockwise the value assigned to it is incremented Conversely the value is decremented 1f you turn it the other way Common system parameters are assigned to Knobs A B and C Pages 41 129 Voice specific parameters are assigned to Knobs 1 and 2 Pages 42 69 A preset of suitable parameter settings is assigned to each Voice By using each knobs 1 and 2 you are in effect adjusting these settings by a certain amount If these parameters are already preset at their minimum or maximum settings the settings cannot be exceeded In any Edit Mode Knobs A B C 1 and 2 are used for entering parameter settings on screen Page 19 Control Sliders In Performance Mode if Master Keyboard Mode is enabled you can use the four Control Sliders to control the functions assigned to each zone Details are given on Pages 56 and 122 VOLUME CONTROL SLIDER 39 Foot Controller An optional Foot Controller such as the FC7 connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack Page 13 on the rear pa
12. Depth 0 Offset 64 Offset 64 Received Velocity offset Velocity Offset As illustrated below the velocity will be increased by the specified amount Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth with offset set to 64 Velocity at tone generator Depth 64 Depth 64 ae Offset 64 Offsete127 F y Oo Offset 96 Dependson 7 L Depth 64 offset Offset 32 Offset 64 Velocity 1 offset 1 Received 1 7 Velocity Offset 32 You can set various MIDI parameters for each Part including MIDI Receive Channel Arpeggiator switch note limit and velocity These parameters are largely used when layering multiple Parts The following four screens are available LYR Mode Layer Mode LYR Limit Layer Limit LYR Tune Layer Tune LYR Out Layer Out LYR Mode Layer Mode You can set the method by which each Part is output The parameters will vary according to the Part selected Part 1 to 16 Plug in Part LYFEMode gt s Mode Are Layer Row lh Parteal Fols mig off 1 Drum Voice Part LYFEMoade 3 Are Layer Rcwlh Parte l on off 1 Multi Plug in Part LY REMode j Ricoweh Parti 1 117 E Mode Select whether each Part is played back monophonically single notes only or polyphonically multiple simultaneous notes This parameter is only available for Normal Voice Parts 1 to 16 and Plug in Part L Settings mono poly E Arp Arpeggio switch Switch the Arpeggiator for the c
13. Example When Elements 2 and 3 are turned off PRE1 PRE 2 Ct Cf 104 DRUM DRUM a QUICK ACCESS pi A PIANO E PIANO ORGAN GTR BASS STRINGS BRASS SYNTH OTHER ELEMENT SELECT ELEMENT ON OFF EG ParamiLoFfFres Lobain HifFres HiGain EL iird 2r4 FHz 17 2 S2kKHz 22 off off 46 Switching Between Screens and Entering Settings After selecting a Common Edit screen or a edit screen for an Element 1 to 4 use the PAGE knob to switch to other screens alej0fst1 OFst2 PrSts OfFst4 8 21 35 Iho AL 0 SHIFT PAGE DATA OG000 PART ELEMENT There are many parameters available within a screen To make editing easier the knobs below the LCD are assigned to each of the parameters in the screen alej0fst1 OFst2 PrSta Of st4 8 21 35 SHIFT PAGE A B c 1 2 DATA PART ELEMENT Menu Screen If you use the PAGE knob while holding down the SHIFT key the settings menu will be displayed Use the PAGE knob to move the cursor to an item and release the SHIFT key to jump to the screen for that item Cursor ENA Elem SOSCSPEHSELT SAMPSLEOSER OSC 2PCHSFLT SHIFT PAGE DATA 6060 PART ELEMENT You can also use other knobs and keys to enter settings The Compare featureallows you to compare the sound being edited against the sound prior to editing Details are given on Pages 19 64 Common Edit Screens Each Voice consists of up to four Ele
14. GI RI Gol Ao a S O C N on A co po 16 Voice Mode spow DN 3 Voice Category Name Voice Category The two characters to the left of the Voice Name denote the category of instrument or sound to which the voice belongs Details about Category names are given on Page 65 Voice Name This consists of up to 10 characters 4 Knob Parameter Display This shows the function assigned to each knob A to C and 1 2 Knobs 1 2 may be assigned with several parameters destinations from multiple control sets In this case the display will show the parameter destination from a control set of the smallest number Knob Parameter Settings In Voice Play Mode each knob A to C and 1 2 can be used to adjust the parameter assigned to it The parameter value is displayed briefly when you move each knob WCE Plays PREL 125 H16 CPf GrandPianod 63 EG Mid EG Hi Cutoff FevTime SHIFT PAGE DATA 0000000 PART ELEMENT Details about assigning parameters to Knobs A to C are given on Page 41 129 Details about assigning parameters to Knobs 1 2 are given on Page 42 69 Octave and MIDI Transmit Channel Settings In Voice Play Mode the Octave and MIDI Transmit Channel are shown when pressing the SHIFT key Octave MIDI Transmit Channel Pe COet PRE1 1258 H163CFf GrandPianod tC Toh 13 SHIFT PAGE DATA 29 6060860 PART ELEMENT This lets
15. RCWUESw1 3 PE ral AT PartPL on oft oft L Settings PB Pitch Bend Wheel off on MW Modulation Wheel off on RB Ribbon Controller off on AT Aftertouch off on RCV Sw2 Receive Switch 2 When set to on each Voice in each Part will receive messages from Knob 1 2 plus Breath Controller Foot Controller and Control Change messages This screen is only available for Parts 1 to 16 including Drum Voice Parts Parts 1 to 16 Drum Voice Part Knob BC FC oft or oft RCVESw22 Krnobl Partel on L Settings Knob1 Knob 1 off on Knob2 Knob 2 off on BC Breath Controller off on FC Foot Controller off on RCV Sw3 Receive Switch 3 When set to on each Voice in each Part will receive volume pan sustain pedal foot switch and Control Change messages Parts 1 to 16 ROVE Sw3 3 ol Par Sus FS Partel or oft or oft Plug in Part Multi Plug in Part ROU Sums J Lol Par Sue PartPL or oft or Drum Voice Part RCUB Sw 3 Wool Pan FS Partia or oft off L Settings Vol Volume off on Pan off on Sus Sustain off on FS Foot Switch off on RCV Sw4 Receive Switch 4 When set to on each Voice in each Part will receive Program Change and Control Change messages when you change Performance Bank Program ROWE Su 4 3 BankSel PomChng CtrChng Part l ort Or ort L Settings BankSel Bank Select off on PgmChng Program Change off on CtrChng Control Change
16. The actual note polyphony will vary depending on the type of tone generator unit used the number of Elements in the Voice and the note polyphony of the Plug in Board In the case of AWM2 Voices the polyphony figure of 64 is divided by the number of Elements in the Voice For instance if a Voice consists of two Elements the maximum note polyphony for the Voice is 32 28 The effects can be used to change the sound of a Voice or Performance There are two Insertion Effect Units plus a Reverb Unit with 12 types of reverb and a Chorus Unit with 23 types of chorus Each of the Insertion Effect units offers a variety of effects and the units themselves can be connected in parallel or in series In Voice Performance Mode different Effects settings can be assigned to each Voice Performance though the way they are connected series or parallel varies slightly As shown in the following illustration the two Insertion Effect units can be independently switched on or off for each Element in a Voice So basically the Insertion Effects can be set on a per Element basis After being passed through the Insertion Effects the signals from all individual Elements are mixed and sent to the Reverb and Chorus Units These Reverb and Chorus Units apply effects to the sound as a whole before it is sent to the outputs and are therefore known as System Effects In Performance Mode the Insertion Effects can be set for two Parts a Voice Part plus a Plu
17. e When moving a cable be careful not to let it catch on the Be careful not to drop or bump the keyboard and make sure circuit Plug in board Forcing the cable in anyway may that it is well balanced before proceeding cut the cable cause damage or result in a malfunction e Before starting installation be sure that you have a coin Move to a position facing the rear panel of the keyboard or a Phillips screwdriver at hand and remove the screws from the Plug in board cover at e Be careful not to misplace any of the screws since all of the bottom left with a coin or phillips screwdriver six ent areiced flat head screws only Do not remove the other screws e Do not use any screws other than what are installed on the instrument e When inserting Plug in boards and connecting cables make sure that you check that they are inserted and connected properly Improperly inserted Plug in boards and cables may cause faulty contacts and an electrical short circuit which may cause damage or result in a malfunction e After mounting the Plug in board be sure to tighten the screws as directed so it is completely stable and does not move in any way DMIA Keep the removed 6 screws in a safe place They will be used when attaching the Plug in board cover to the keyboard again 141 Appendix xipuoddy Remove the Plug in board cover Mount the Plug in board onto the plate as detailed in the Plug in board plate appears following ste
18. 16 Wey Sasenicanvineaunemicanivimeiuns 7 18 151 Q ORO BP OCE EI E E ERRAR 109 ORD Bircet trl Ordre Ddi 0 eegacccassssrcscvssnuerenoeasannacnicess 66 88 94 OED EG Quick Edit Envelope Generator scccccisesssessccrssseee 67 88 94 110 OED Filter Quick Edit Filter sssicsvciestsvecssnsserassaevcesveevenves 67 88 94 110 OED Level Quick Bet Lorelei 66 88 94 109 eer ee sb ice aes nee mene ete iri NE anaT SNE nO Het DROS Na Senn OR FL Seen Sem rN oe 7 R RCY ar Swich ecos 118 RCY Sw2 Receive Switch 2 craiirnirennsininenrnadeounrineaoaane 118 ROY Seo Peere 8 W000 aN 119 POV wilen a aa E 119 Reading the Displayed Song sirare sni Ean EE 105 EAE E E A E E E A E 139 Povon UTE onrera anA EN 50 74 113 S E ta nacido ies E hat EE E E EE E E eae eee Tor E d E TA A E T E E E T ATT 59 102 Be re 0 EENE 65 cere n a DOE epn RE 16 a E E NI EEA IENE E AT II ON OAN EAE Pe 18 Selecting Preset Drums PRE DR1 DR8 easssssresserrisrsrsrisrrerrerrssress 61 eet Me Arpon o TYPO eonna 36 67 Selecting User Drums UNT DR1 2 and EXT DRE h ensencnscnnon 61 PO eene Ca eE 125 E N N E i SEO Demo Seguence Demno nurnerenirbrioriti tioN 125 aee r TOE E 17 20 Lee oae e Non L a af BR Al TOE a E sY e E a E ENENG 65 Setting Viewing Knob Paraeters vvcccsnsessnvsnessrsasseneneronessvnmeannvesenvss 60 103 E ATENT 6 18 Siogle Part Florin PoariS sairiiiresenhi rrekin en ane EENET 2T Oe E 15 135 et T A ER 58 126 A E A reenter nti thr 52 T
19. A to C L Settings see the separate Data List for details The positions of Knobs A B C can be memorized for each Voice Performance If a Master Equalizer parameter is selected as the destination the M EQ settings of vce in Utility Mode are increased decreased Using Knobs A B C CTRL Other Controller Other Set the Foot Switch parameter CTRL Others FS Sys b4C Sustain J E FS Foot Switch Assign a Control Change message to the Foot Switch Settings 000 100 000 032 off 096 Arp Sw 097 Arpeggio Hold 098 Sequence PLAY STOP 099 100 Program Change INC DEC Details about Control Numbers and Control Changes are given in the separate Data List Utility Mode powW 4N You can set overall MIDI parameters for the system The following five screens are available MIDI Ch MIDI Channel MIDI Arp MIDI Arpeggio MIDI Sw MIDI Receive Switch MIDI Other MIDI GM XG Receive MIDI Ch MIDI Channel Set the MIDI Channel parameters Rec Trans MIGI Cho Local Dewi Sys omni ll OFT E Recv Basic Receive Channel Set the MIDI Receive channel for using the synthesizer with an external sequencer computer and so on and for using it as a MIDI tone generator Settings 1 16 omni all channels off E Trans Keyboard Transmit Channel Set the MIDI Transmit channel for transmitting MIDI from the keyboard controllers and so on Li Settings Chl Ch16 off E Local
20. Cutoff Range 4 Frequency BPFW Band Pass Filter Wide Also the combination of a 12dB oct HPF and LPF but can have a wider frequency band than the BPF12D filter Level Cutoff range 4 Cutoff range Range passed 4 Frequency e BEF Band Elimination Filter This attenuates a band of signals around the Cutoff frequency but passes everything else BEF6 Band Elimination Filter 6dB oct Level Range passed Cutoff range Range passed a a i i Li Li Li J 1 4 L Center frequency Frequency e THRU The filters are bypassed and the entire signal is unaffected E Gain Set the Gain the amount of boost applied to the signal sent to the Filter Unit Li Settings 0 255 79 Voice Mode spow DN E Cutoff Set the Cutoff frequency This is used as the basic frequency for the selected Filter Type I Settings 0 255 E Reso Resonance Band Width This parameter s function varies according to the selected Filter Type If an LPF or HPF has been selected this parameter is used to set the Resonance For the BPF excluding the BPFW and the BEF it is used to select the Band For the BPFW it is used to adjust the Width of the band With the LPF and HPF the Reso parameter is used to set the amount of Resonance harmonic emphasis applied to the signal at the Cutoff frequency This can be used in combination with the Cutoff frequency parameter to add further character t
21. E RcvBulk Receive Bulk Select whether or not Bulk Dump data can be received T Settings protect off on E BankSel Bank Select Set to enable or disable transmission and reception of Bank Select messages between the instrument and an external MIDI device With any setting other than off the instrument can receive a Bank Select massage coming in and it can also send a Bank Select massage out to an external MIDI device when you select a Bank using a MEMORY key or the like on its front panel Li Settings off all part perform off Ignores does not receive a Bank Select message The instrument does not send this message either all Receives all Bank Select messages coming in When the instrument receives only a Program Change message in Performance Mode that message selects a Part s Voice part Receives only Bank Select messages for selecting a Voice Bank whichever mode you are working in perform Receives only Bank Select messages for selecting a Performance Bank when you are working in Performance Mode When you are working in Voice Mode the instrument only receives Bank Select messages for selecting a Voice Bank E PgmChng Program Change Set to enable or disable reception of a Program Change message coming in With this parameter set to on the instrument can receive a Program Change massage coming in and it can also send a Program Change out to an external MIDI device when you select a Voi
22. L Settings fingered fulltime If the Mode in GEN Other is set to mono fingered Portamento is only applied when you play legato playing the next note before releasing the previous one fulltime Portamento is always applied If the Mode in GEN Other is set to poly This is the same as for mono except that Portamento is applied to multiple notes CTL Bend Pitch Bend You can set the amount by which the Pitch Bend Wheel changes the pitch of the Voice UFFer 1 CTLEPitchBernd gt Lower C 1234 1 E Lower Set the amount in semitones by which the Voice pitch changes when the Pitch Bend Wheel is moved downwards For example a value of 12 means that the pitch of the Voice drops by up to an octave when 69 the Pitch Bend Wheel is moved downwards Li Settings 48 O 24 E Upper Set the amount in semitones by which the Voice pitch changes when the Pitch Bend Wheel is moved upwards For example a value of 12 means that the pitch of the Voice rises by up to an octave when the Pitch Bend Wheel is moved upwards Li Settings 48 O 24 CTL Set1 Control Set 1 to CTL Set6 Control Set 6 The controllers and knobs on the front panel the keyboard and so on can be assigned a variety of uses For example keyboard aftertouch can be used to control vibrato and the Modulation Wheel could be used to control Resonance They can even be used to control parameters within individual Elemen
23. Mix Voice You can assign a Voice to each Part Use Knob A to select the Part then set its Voice parameters The display will vary as follows according to the Part selected e If PartO1 to Partl has been selected You can use the same method as the Category Search Page 62 to set the Voice J Search AIeBUces Memory Humber CLor ar CH1i6 CPF GrandPianad t i FRE1 128 E Memory Voice Memory L Settings PRE1 Preset 1 PRE2 Preset 2 INT Internal Normal EXT External Normal PRE Preset Drum INT Internal Drum EXT External Drum E Number Program Number L Settings 1 128 for Normal Voices DR1 DR8 for Preset Drum DR1 DR2 for Internal External Drum Details about Categories are given in the Category List on Page 65 114 If PariPL Plug in has been selected Set the Voice for the Plug in Part This screen is only displayed if a Plug in Board has been installed Use Knob B to select PLG INT internal memory and the MSB LSB Plug in Board s Bank and use Knob C to select the Program Number MI sBUices Bank Humber CthLory Search FartPL HORM 6B1 128 H161 C PF GrandFiano E Bank L Settings PartPL Plug in PLG INT Plug in Internal MSB LSB Plug in Bank For details about Plug in Banks Bank Select MSB LSB refer to the Owner s Manual that came with your Plug in Board E Number Program Number L Settings PLG INT Plug in Internal 1 64 MSB
24. Recall previous edits When you enter Performance Job Mode you will first see the Initialize screen The following four screens are available for each Performance Job Before entering Performance Job Mode and using the Initialize or Recall function you must select the Performance you wish to operate on Page 104 Ist screen PFM Initialize 2nd screen PFM Edit Recall 3rd screen PFM Copy 4th screen PFM Bulk Dump Details about how to enter Performance Job Mode are given on Page 17 a Job Executing Qn Performance Play Mode select the Performance Number on which you will execute the Job Press the JOB key to enter Performance Job Mode Use the PAGE knob and switch to the screen showing the Job you wish to execute PFM Initializes Job Current Perform O Use Knobs B C and Knobs 1 2 to select the parameter on which you will execute the Job Alternatively use the DATA knob and the DEC NO and INC YES keys This step is not applicable for Recall and Bulk Dump Jobs When you press the ENTER key you will be prompted for confirmation PF Bulk Oume3 Di Are you sure YES CHO P Press the INC YES key to confirm The message Completed will be displayed when the Job has completed and you will be returned to the original screen Press the DEC NO key to cancel the Job For Jobs that take longer to process you will see the message Executing during proces
25. Strings Orchestral Synth Comping Ensemble Vocal Brass Combination Reed Material Wave Pipe Sequence Synth Lead Voice Mode spow DN GEN Other General Other There are various parameters for Micro Tuning and for controlling how the generated sound is output GENBOtLher Mode Assign MicroTuning C 1234 Foly single S1iIndiarn E Mode Select monophonic or polyphonic playback Select whether the Voice is played back monophonically single notes only or polyphonically multiple simultaneous notes L Settings mono poly E Assign If you set Key Assign to single the doubled playback of the same note is prevented The synthesizer will terminate a note when the same note is received again If you select multi the synthesizer will consecutively assign each instance of the same received note to a separate channel making multiple part tone generation possible Li Settings single multi E MicroTuning Set the Micro Tuning tuning system or temperament used for the Voice Normally you would use Equal Temperament but there are also 31 other tuning systems available I Settings see the following list Equal temperament The compromise tuning used for most of the last 200 years of Western music and found on most electronic keyboards Each half step is exactly 1 12 of an octave and music can be played in any key with equal ease However none of the intervals are perfectly in tune
26. VOICE at caus cia r E EREN 64 101 kOn E EEE A EE E A AAEE E E A eee ai 223l PO e aaa een mEnt cer enrOe rea at Mee Rtentan rent mene a 6 W A EE E E AIETE AE I E EI PE EE TS TT T 33 Z I asa EEE AEA AEA IA A TE E EA A EEA E E T E ented 121 152 SY21 For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgef hrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragsh ndlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsl ndern erh ltlich Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario M1S 3R1 Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S A De C V Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No 1149 Col Gpe Del Moral Deleg Iztapalapa 09300 Mexico D F Tel 686 00 33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA Av Rebou as 2636 S o Paulo Brasil Tel 011 853 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Argentina S A Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panama S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbaniz
27. When you press the ENTER key you will see a confirmation message spow pb Files are named according to the MS DOS naming convention If the file name contains spaces and other characters unrecognized in MS DOS these characters will automatically be replaced by _ underscore characters when saving The types of data that you can select for each File Type and the locations to which they will be loaded are as follows cc 99 perf Performance Loads Card CPFEInit Perf CPfEInit Perf J EST E64 D165 gt ts he Performance Memory to Performance Memory of file to be loaded source which file will be loaded target Performance Number of file to be loaded source You can load files from Memory Card to the synthesizer is as follows Load File UOICEDIR SUBDIR 1 Card Gif NEUF TLE 520 Data to be loaded File Number of File Type file to be loaded Performance Number to which file will be loaded target Li Settings Source Performance Memory INT Internal EXT External Source Performance Number all all Performances 1 128 INT 1 64 EXT Target Performance Memory INT Internal EXT External Target Performance Number all all Performances 1 128 INT 1 64 EXT E Type File Type LI Settings all all data perf Performance all voice voice chain Sequence Chain plugin Use Knob B to select the File Type of the data to be loaded
28. are given on Page 125 21 Voices and Performances Playing a Voice Based on an AWM2 synthesis engine this synthesizer offers various kinds of preset Voices 256 Normal Voices and 8 Drum Voices You can also create your original Voices and store them into the instrument s internal memory INT or an external Memory Card EXT The internal and external memory can each contain up to 128 Normal Voices and 2 Drum Voices You can freely select and play Voices from both groups of memories as explained in the following QUICK ACCI FECI NOOoOoOoOoOoo NOOoOOoOoOooo VOICE key DEC NO and INC YES keys MEMORY key DATA knob Press the VOICE key Press a MEMORY key The VOICE key LED will light showing that 0 Select a Voice Memory iain ne Moe Play Mode The following There are five Voice Memories PRE1 Preset 1 appears in the display PRE2 Preset 2 INT Internal EXT External and PLG Plug in Within each Voice Memory are several Banks up to eight A to H in which voice CPERFORM STORE the Voices are stored The following illustration shows how Voices are stored in a Voice Memory MODE OUTILITY OcaRD CO FQ C C PRE2 Preset 2 EXT External Bank A H Bank A H QOEDIT JOB ELAY COMPARE UCE Plays PRE1 661 A61 9054 Generation EG Low G E Mid G EGHi G FLT Fez HFF PRE1 Preset 1 INT Internal PLG Plug in At this point you can play the Voice named
29. beforehand Wf The Memory Cards formatted with this instrument may become unusable with other instruments E About the Memory Cards To handle Memory Cards with care There are times when static electricity affects Memory Cards Before you handle Memory Cards to reduce the possibility of static electricity touch the metal parts such as a door knob and aluminum sash Be sure to remove the Memory Card from the Memory Card slot when it is not in use for a long time Do not expose the Memory Card to direct sunlight extremely high or low temperatures or excessive humidity dust or liquids Do not place heavy objects on a Memory Card or bend or apply pressure to the Memory Card in any way Do not touch the metal part gold of the Memory Card or put any metallic plate onto the metal part Do not expose the Memory Card to magnetic fields such as those produced by televisions speakers motors etc since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the Memory Card rendering it unreadable Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a Memory Card Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location e To protect your data Write protect To prevent inadvertent erasure of important data stick the write protect seal provided in the Memory Card package onto the designated area within a circle of the Memory Card Conversely speaking to save data on the Memory Card make sure to remove the wr
30. can use Knob 2 to switch the Arpeggiator on off Details are given in the separate Performance List 25 An Overview of the 30 In this section an overview of the many features of the S30 is given The S30 hardware is made up of a number of sections as shown in the following diagram Controller Section Sequencer Tone Generator Section Section Song File Playback AWM2 Arpeggiator Plug in Board Effects Section Controller Section This section consists of the keyboard Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels Control Sliders Assignable knobs and so on The keyboard itself doesn t generate sounds but instead sends note velocity and other information to the synthesizer s tone generator section when you plays notes The controllers also send changes Information from the keyboard and controllers can be transmitted to other external MIDI devices through the MIDI OUT connector This section can be used to play back Standard MIDI Files held on Memory Card The contents of Tracks 1 to 16 correspond to MIDI channels and Parts in a Performance as shown in the following illustration The sequencer can play back songs with a different Voice assigned to each Part Tone Generator Sequencer Performance Parts racks bass one I I I I I I I Li L Li Li 26 Tone Generator Section This section plays back sounds according to information received from the keyboard and controllers The following example illustrates the path
31. each Voice This synthesizer has two System Effect Units Reverb and Chorus plus two Insertion Effect Units When using a Plug in Board PLG installed on the instrument you can also use a separate Insertion Effect Unit that is dedicated for the Plug in Part Different effects settings can be set per Voice in Voice Mode and per Performance in Performance Mode though the connection between the Effect Units will vary in each case The Reverb Unit includes a selection of 12 different reverb type effects including realistic simulations of the natural reverberation found in various halls and rooms In Voice Mode Reverb settings can be set for each Voice In Performance Mode the Reverb settings will apply to the Performance as a whole The Chorus Unit includes a selection of 23 chorus type effects including a flanger and others Most of these effects are ideal for adding thickness to the sound In Voice Mode Chorus settings can be set for each Voice In Performance Mode the Chorus settings will apply to the Performance as a whole The Insertion Effect 1 Unit includes 24 effects including chorus flanger and auto wah The Insertion Effect 2 Unit offers delays reverbs rotary speaker amp simulation and other effects providing a total of 92 effects If a Plug in Board has been installed up to 24 Insertion Effects for the Plug in Voices will also be available Details about each Effect Type are given in the Effect Type Li
32. load rename or delete a file use Knob B to select the File Type and Knob C to select the File Number File Directories Directories are denoted by DIR next to the directory name To open a directory use Knob C to move the cursor to it and press the ENTER key All the files in the directory are displayed If you select File Number 000 up dir will be displayed By pressing the ENTER key you will be returned to the parent directory i e moved up one directory level When saving or renameing the directory for the currently selected file is displayed if you press the SHIFT key When you press the ENTER key you will see a confirmation message Load Tyre File WOTCEDIR SUBDIR 1 aa Are you sure CYESI CHO gt QOPress the INC YES key to execute the operation The message Completed will be displayed after it has executed and you will be returned to the previous screen The operation will be canceled if you press the DEC NO key during execution If the operation takes some time to execute you will see the message Executing If you switch the power off in this state the data may be damaged The steps in the procedure may vary slightly depending on the operation being performed Refer to the explanation of each operation for details 137 You can view the amount of free and used on the Memory Card There are no settings Status Used Free Card 2 MBFB 1
33. lowest note and G8 for the highest Note that this key range setting will make a overlapped range with Zone 3 For detailed settings of a Zone refer to page 121 Turn the Knob A and select a Part for a Zone In this example we select Part 1 for Zone 1 Part 2 and Part 3 respectively for Zone 2 and Zone 3 We don t select any internal Part for Zone 4 since Zone 4 is set only to output performance information via MIDI Out First select Part 1 Part01 for Zone 1 You can also use the MEMORY or PROGRAM PART keys to select a Part for a Zone page 104 Use the PAGE knob and open the MIX Vce screen to set up a Voice for performance using the Arpeggiator MIABUce Memory Humber CtLory Search Fart l FFE1 1285 H16 i CFF GrandPianod Use the PAGE knob and open the Layer Mode LYR Mode screen Set the Arpeggiator Switch Arp to on Layer Switch Layer to off and MIDI receive channel RcvCh to 1 Finally in the Arpeggio type ARP Type screen set the Switch parameter to on LYREMode Mode Are Laver Partel F f Rcwlh oly or m 1 Prepare basic Arpeggiator settings Type etc in Voice Edit Mode before you set up a Zone setting in Performance Edit Mode With settings made in steps to you can now play the Arpeggiator with a Voice assigned to Part01 Part 1 set to MIDI receive channel 1 RevCh when you play in the key range of Zone 1 As in the same manner in ste
34. off on Part Controller You can set various Controller parameters for the Multi Plug in Parts 17 to 32 The following six screens for the Multi Plug in Part parameters are available CTL MW Control MW Control Depth Multi Plug in Parts only CTL MW Modulation MW Modulation Depth Multi Plug in Parts only CTL AT Control AT Control Depth Multi Plug in Parts only CTL AT Modulation AT Modulation Depth Multi Plug in Parts only CTL AC Control AC Control Depth Multi Plug in Parts only CTL AC Modulation AC Modulation Depth Multi Plug in Parts only CTL MW Control MW Control Depth Multi Plug in Parts only The Modulation Wheel can be used to control Filter and Amp parameters for each Multi Plug in Part 17 to 32 CTLEMW Controls tir Filter Are Par 65 65 E Filter Set the amount by which the Modulation Wheel can be used to adjust the filter s Cutoff frequency Li Settings 64 63 E Amp Set the amount by which the Modulation Wheel can be used to adjust the output level amplitude Li Settings 64 63 CTL MW Modulation pin Modulation Depth Multi Plug in Parts only The Modulation Wheel can be used to control the amount of pitch filter amplitude modulation applied to each Multi Plug in Part 17 to 32 CTLEMW Modulation PMoad F Parti 127 hd JEL Alfiad 127 E PMod Pitch Modulation Depth Set the amount by which the pitch modulation changes when
35. set to on their Arp parameter Arpeggio Switch also has to be set to on Page 117 Voice Edit There are 256 Normal Voice presets and 8 Drum Voice presets You can edit these to create new Voices or build completely new Voices from scratch You can then store up to 128 of these new edited Normal Voices and up to 2 new edited Drum Voices to internal user memory or external Memory Card The following procedure gives a basic idea about how to go about creating editing Voices Of course this is just one example you are free to set any parameters in any way you like Details about each parameter are given in the Reference section of this manual All parameter settings are stored along with the Voice itself Qn Voice Play Mode select the Voice you wish to edit Enter Voice Edit Mode In the Common Edit screens set the parameters common to all Elements in the Voice volume pitch tone etc You can also set parameters related to the Arpeg giator Controllers Effects and so on At the OSC Oscillator screens select the Waves used by the Elements in the Voice plus the volume pan note range and other basic parameters At the PCH Pitch and PEG Pitch Envelope Generator screens set the tuning and other pitch related parameters used by the Elements Also set the PEG parameters as necessary QO At the FLT Filter and FEG Filter Envelope Generator screens adjust the parameters o
36. used as the basic setting A positive setting will lower the output level for lower notes and raise it for higher notes A negative setting will have the opposite effect Li Settings 200 0 200 84 E Center Center Key This shows that the basic Level is at note C3 At this note the output level remains unchanged For other notes the output levels vary according to the Level settings The Center setting cannot be changed Large D Small Speed of AEG level change Lower range Center Basic Pitch Higher range E EGTime The EGTime parameter controls the AEG Times for each Element according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard The Center parameter is used as the basic amplitude for this parameter A positive setting will cause the amplitude of lower notes to change slower and that of higher notes to change faster Negative values will have the opposite effect L Settings 64 0 63 E Center Center Key Set the basic pitch used by the EGTime parameter When the Center note is played the AEG behaves according to its actual settings The amplitude change characteristics for other notes will vary in proportion to the EGTime settings L Settings C 2 G8 You can also set this parameter by pressing the respective note on the keyboard while holding down the SHIFT key Positive value Speed of AEG level change Lower range Center Basic Pitch Higher range
37. waveform Select the waveform used by the LFO and set the speed of change LFOBWave Wave Seeed Keys ric ELi23 ri 63 ori E Wave Select the LFO waveform used to vary the sound There are three waveforms available L Settings saw tri squ saw sawtooth wave tri triangle wave squ square wave spow DN E Speed Set the speed of the LFO waveform A larger setting means a faster speed Li Settings 0 63 Speed Fast Time Speed Slow Time E KeySync Switch Key Sync on or off When switched on the LFO waveform is reset every time a note is played Li Settings off on Sync off Sync on Time Time Key on Key on LFO Depth Set the amount by which the LFO waveform controls changes in Pitch Filter Amp settings LFORDertLh 2 Pi EL1i 234 1 E PMod Pitch Modulation Depth Set the amount depth by which the LFO waveform varies modulates the pitch of the sound A larger setting means a larger modulation depth Li Settings 0 127 E FMod Filter Modulation Depth Set the amount depth by which the LFO waveform varies modulates the Filter Cutoff frequency A larger setting means a larger modulation depth Li Settings 0 127 E AMod Amplitude Modulation Depth Set the amount depth by which the LFO waveform varies modulates the amplitude of the sound A larger setting means a larger modulation depth Li Settings 0 127 You can set the following two Equalizer parameters for
38. you can use the MIDI Ch screen in Utility Mode to set MIDI transmission channels Page 130 Performance Mode spow SIUDWIOJ 9 Performance Program Selection E E Oe Oe Oe Oe Oe Oe Oe Oe Oe Oe Oe Oe Oe Oe Oe E eeeoeeaoeeoeeoaeaeoaeaeeaeneeeee 8 There are four ways in which you can select a Performance Using the BANK PROGRAM keys Using the DEC NO and INC YES keys Using the DATA knob Using the Category Search Using the INC YES and DEC NO keys the DATA knob or the Category Search function is the same as selecting the Voice directly in Voice Play Mode Refer to Page 60 replacing the word Voice with Performance Press the MEMORY INT or EXT key and select the Performance Memory The selected Performance Memory indicator in the display will blink PRE1 PRE 2 DOO ee DRUM DRUM D SU FFM Plays IHT 12SCH16 CPPS Init Perf J Et Low EQ Mid ER Hi 1 4 Details about Performance Memories are given on Page 24 Press a BANK key A to H to select a Bank The Bank indicator in the display will blink Press Bank keys A to D when selecting an EXT Performance PRE1 PRE 2 Ct 1 CI 124 DRUM DRUM aaa QUICK ACCESS al c D E F G H A PIANO E PIANO ORGAN GTR BASS_ STRINGS BRASS SYNTH OTHER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ti 12 13 14 15 16 SW NUH PFM Flasi IHT 128 H16 CPF Init Perf J Ell Low El Mid E Hi l 8 If you press the EXIT key here the Performance selectio
39. 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 067 068 069 071 072 073 074 077 078 079 080 083 084 085 086 089 090 091 092 095 096 097 098 099 101 102 103 104 107 108 109 110 113 114 115 116 119 120 121 122 2 125 126 127 16 128 E 2 E 2 3 E 3 4 E 4 8 E 8 9 E 9 10 E 10 13 E 13 14 E 14 15 E 15 16 E 16 3 F 3 4 F 4 5 F 5 6 F 6 10 F 10 11 F 11 12 F 12 15 F 15 16 F 16 1 G 1 2 G 2 5 G 5 6 G 6 7 G 7 8 G 8 O 9 G 9 11 G 11 12 G 12 13 G 13 14 G 14 1 H 2 H 2 3 H 3 4 H 4 8 H 8 9 H 9 10 H 10 C ie CE Ae 13 H 13 14 H 14 15 H 15 H A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B C C C C C C C C C C D D D D D D D D D D D0 D D D D D 16 3 Performance Category Name Performance Category A two letter abbreviation of the Performance Category is Shown to the left of the Performance Name This gives you a rough idea of the Performance s sound The name of a Performance can consist of up to 10 characters 103 Setting Viewing Knob Parameters In Performance Play Mode you can use Knobs A to C a
40. 121 e When playing back a song using the internal sequencer or an external MIDI device have the volume and expression parameters been set appropriately e When playing performances using the internal sequencer or an external MIDI device have the transmit channels for each sequencer track and the receive channels for each Part in the Performance been set correctly Page 117 e For Performances is the volume of each Part sufficiently high Page 115 e Have you selected EXT Memory without having inserted a Memory Card Page 23 e With the Arpeggiator enabled has the Arpeggio Category parameter been set to Ct and the Key Mode parameter set to something other than direct Page 67 There is no arpeggiator sound e Has the Arpeggiator s note range been set appropriately Page 68 e In Performance Mode have the Layer Switch and Arpeggio Switch parameters for the Part s been set to ON Page 117 e Has the Tempo parameter in the ARP Type screen been set to MIDI despite no MIDI clock signals being received 145 Appendix xipuoddy Arpeggiator settings On Off Hold Tempo cannot be changed e Plug in Boards feature their own built in arpeggio pattern generators Details are given on Page 134 and also in the Owner s Manual that comes with each Plug in Board For the PLG150 AN Plug in Board the settings are found in the Arp SEO Sw screen Details are given on Page 29 of the PLG150 AN Owner s Manual S
41. 127 E AMod Amplitude Modulation Depth Set the amount by which the amplitude modulation changes when the controller Source is used Li Settings 0 127 Zones You can edit the zones used by Performances in Master Keyboard Mode Use Knob A or BANK A D keys to select the zone 1 to 4 then set the zone s parameters The following eight screens are available for Master Keyboard parameters You can choose zones if 4zone has been selected as the Mode at the GEN M Kbd screen Page 108 and if the MASTER KEYBOARD key LED is lit e Master keyboard MKB Transmit Master Keyboard Transmit MKB Note Master Keyboard Note MKB TxSw1 Master Keyboard Transmit Switch 1 MKB TxSw2 Master Keyboard Transmit Switch 2 MKB TxSw3 Master Keyboard Transmit Switch 3 MKB TxSw4 Master Keyboard Transmit Switch 4 MKB TxPreset1 Master Keyboard Transmit Preset 1 MKB TxPreset2 Master Keyboard Transmit Preset 2 MKB Assign Master Keyboard Assign MKB Transmit Master Keyboard Transmit You can set parameters for transmitting keyboard data when in Master Keyboard Mode ME BET ansmits Trns Ch TG MIDI fone 1 or ort E TrnsCh Transmit Channel Set the MIDI Transmit Channel for each zone L Settings 1 16 E TG Tone Generator Select whether or not to transmit MIDI messages for each zone to each Part s tone generator Li Settings off on E MIDI MIDI Transmit Select whether or not to transmit MIDI messages
42. Arpeggiator in Performance Mode the Arpeggio and Layer Switches Page 117 must be set to on The Note Limit parameters in Performance Mode are different to those in Voice Mode and notes outside the set range will not sound The Arpeggiator Switch parameter Page 117 for each Part should be set to on except for the Part which you wish to use to play the melody Then if necessary use the Note Limit parameter Page 117 to restrict the keyboard range for that Part ARP Type Arpeggio Type ARP Limit Arpeggio Note Limit ARP Mode Arpeggio Mode ARP PlayEF Arpeggio Play Effect Common Controller You can assign MIDI Control Change Numbers to the controls and front panel knobs For example Knob 1 2 can be set to control the amount of effect applied to a sound and the Foot Controller can be set to control modulation You can set different Control Set assignments for each Performance The following two Control Set screens are available CTL Assign1 Controller Assign 1 CTL Assign2 Controller Assign 2 CTL Assign 1 Controller Assign 1 Use Knobs C 1 and 2 to assign Control Numbers to the Breath Controller Knob 1 and Knob 2 respectively The selected function is shown on the left of the display Control Change Name Control Change Numbers CTLBASsi9ni3 BC Enabi Knob Common ae 16 iW SHIFT PAGE A 59 PART ELEMENT c 1 2 DATA E BC Breath Controller Set Control Change
43. Banks A to H and Program Numbers 01 to 16 Therefore you can cycle through Voice Program Numbers 001 to 128 sequentially or you can select them randomly using a combination of BANK and PROGRAM keys The relationship between Banks Program Numbers and Voice Program Numbers is given below Voice Program Number 065 066 067 068 069 Voice Program Number 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 Program Number Program Bank Number Bank O N O 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 O 00 N 083 084 085 086 087 O ee ec 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 _ l me h h st and 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 14 126 15 127 16 128 l l h h h Q O h h h h h h h h h h ad aab aab an a ee a S Se ee ee e a ee ee ee a ea ax or Bool po O OO N 07 A 09 Po 54 Gl KR Go pg a1 CO 00 N A o Po Gl Rl Golo AIS Ni r A 09 Po
44. Chain Step screen and change the Chain settings in advance even while a Song is being played back A il indicator is displayed to the right of the Chain Step Number at the Chain Step screen of the Song file currently being played back Sequence Play Mode apow Anjq eouenbas E Song File Number Assign a Song file to the Chain Step Any Song files with the MID extension can be selected When you select a file Number here the file name is shown in the top line of the display For continuous chained playback of multiple Chain Steps you can specify how to play this Chain Step after playback of a previous one by selecting an option from among skip end and stop If you select skip the Chain Step is skipped and playback will jump to the next Chain Step If you choose to skip the 99th Chain Step playback will jump back to the first Chain Step after the 98th Chain Step If you select end when the Song reaches this Chain Step chained playback is stopped and you are returned to the first Chain Step If you select stop the Song stops when it reaches this Chain Step When the Song playback is resumed it starts at the next Chain Step Ll Settings skip end stop 001 997 E Playback Tempo Set the playback tempo of the Chain Step When you start playback of the song it is normal that a tempo value contained in the song file is automatically set to this parameter If necessary you can
45. Control Change Numbers to the Foot Controller and Ribbon Controller respectively The selected function is shown on the left of the display Use Knob 2 to select the Ribbon Controller Mode FE He RE CTRL Assign Wie 22 Control Change Name Control Change Number E FC Foot Controller Assign a Control Change Number to the Foot Controller The Foot Controller is connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER connector on the rear panel Page 13 I Settings 00 95 see the separate Data List for details E RB Ribbon Controller Specify a Control Change Number for this Assignable Controller When MIDI information for this Assignable Controller is received the specified Control Change is applied I Settings 00 95 see the separate Data List for details Details about Controller Assign settings in Performance Mode are given on Page 111 133 y in Board has been installed If you have a Plug in Board installed the following two screens are available for setting its parameters However the number of sub screens and parameters will vary depending on the type of Plug in Board installed PLG MIDI Plug in MIDI PLG System Plug in System PLG MIDI Plug in MIDI Set the MIDI parameters of the Plug in Board PLG MIDI Clock Dewi PLG158 AH or all E Clock Select whether or not to transmit MIDI Clock messages to the Plug in Board L Settings off on E DevNo Device Number Set the MIDI Device Number o
46. Edit Envelope Generator The EG Envelope Generator controls the transition in output level over time for each Voice in a Layer Part There are four parameters governing the transition in output level from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released or the point at which the output level has faded to zero These Layer Part settings make use the each of the Part Edit settings QEDEBEG Common Attack 63 Decay Sustain Release 65 63 63 Level Sustain Level Attack Decay Release Time Time Time j Key on Key off 110 E Attack Set the transition time from the moment a key on the keyboard is pressed to the point at which the output level of the Layer Part reaches its peak L Settings 64 0 63 E Decay Set the transition time from the point at which the output level of the Layer Part reaches its peak to the point at which it levels off L Settings 64 0 63 E Sustain Set the output level of the Layer Part maintained while the key on the keyboard is being held down Ll Settings 64 0 63 E Release Set the transition time from the point at which the key on the keyboard is released to the point at which the output level of the Layer Part reaches zero L Settings 64 0 63 The following four screens govern the behavior of the Arpeggiator The parameters are the same as those used in Voice Edit Mode Details are given on Page 67 To use the
47. Effects Unit and the dry signal which has not been passed through the Effects Unit This may be unavailable depending on the selected Effect Type LiSettings D63 gt W D W D lt W63 Effect Parameter Settings These parameters are available when you press the ENTER key for certain Effect Types Use the PAGE knob to switch between screens and use the other knobs and the INC YES and DEC NO keys to set each parameter When you press the EXIT key you will be returned to the Effect Type selection screen Effect Type selection screen EFFGEF2 gt Cory Tyre C 123 DOLY DelasLCR DryvlWet CEHTER DWE to Edit EXIT ENTER U Parameter settings screen EFFGEF2 TimeL DelasLCE 333 3m Timer Timel Bry hlet 166 rm 5660 Bm Dx WES DATA B Cc 1 2 The number of Parameters and the contents of each screen will vary depending on the selected Effect Type Details are given in the Effect Type List Effect Parameter List of the separate Data List SHIFT PAGE A oe PART ELEMENT Voice Mode spow DN EFF Rev Reverb You can select the Reverb Effect Type then press the ENTER key to set its parameters EFFOFen Tyre C if Fe Return CENTER a4 Basement 12r to Edit E Type Reverb Effect Type Set the Reverb Effect Type Li Settings Details are given in the Effect Types list of the separate Data List E Return Set the Return level of the Reverb Effect L Settings 0 127 EF
48. Local On Off If you set Local to off the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the synthesizer s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers However the data will be transmitted through the MIDI OUT Also the tone generator section will respond to messages received at the MIDI IN Li Settings off on E DevNo Device Number Set the MIDI Device Number This number must match the Device Number of the external MIDI device when transmitting receiving bulk data parameter changes or other system exclusive messages to from it Li Settings 1 16 all off MIDI Arp MIDI Arpeggio Set the arpeggiator s MIDI parameters MIGI Are Switch Hold OutcUcesChtUces Sys 1 6r 66 oft 16 130 E Switch Select the Control Change Number used to control the ARPEGGIO ON OFF key Li Settings 000 095 000 032 off E Hold Select the Control Change Number used to control the ARPEGGIO HOLD key T Settings 000 095 000 032 off E Out Vce Enable disable the output or Arpeggiator data to external MIDI devices through the MIDI Out T Settings off disabled on enabled E Ch Vce Arpeggio Transmit Channel Select the MIDI channel through which Arpeggio data will be sent Li Settings 1 16 MIDI Sw MIDI Receive Switch Set the MIDI Receive parameters HIDI SwakcvBulk BankSel PomChnd Control Sys on Perform off model
49. MIDI devices from the keyboard such as using different Voice tones in the lower and upper key ranges Select ch01 for Lower and ch02 for Upper for this example You can also use the PROGRAM PART 1 to 16 keys to select MIDI channels for the Lower and Upper ranges Page 108 QSelect a Part for the lower range using the Knob A For this example select Part01 Turn the PAGE knob and open the MIX Vce Mix Voice page to select a Voice for Arpeggiator performance MIeBWce Memor rE Ctory Search Partai PRE BI CPF GrandPiancad Turn the PAGE knob and open the LYR Mode Layer Mode page Set on for Arp Arpeggio switch Select 1 for RevCh MIDI Receive Channel LYFEMode gt s Mode Are Layer Row lh Parteal Fols or off 1 Turn the PAGE knob and open the ARP Type Arpeggio Type page Set on for Switch ARPETyFe Tufe Teneo Switch Hold Commor Ur cti 54 128 or off In steps to you now complete settings for the lower range for Arpeggiator performance It will play in a Voice assigned to Part 1 based on MIDI Receive channel 1 Refer to page 67 for detailed settings of Arpeg giator You can copy reuse the arpeggio settings that belong to the Voice assigned to Part 1 page 123 As in the same manner as in steps to O make settings for the upper range So you can use the Knob A and select Part02 select a Voice for solo performanc
50. Middle M EQ Mid Middle M EO HighMid High Middle M EO High Q Frequency Characteristic Gain Freq Frequency Utility Mode powW 4N M EQ Low Master EQ Low This Equalizer covers low frequencies You can adjust the signal level at the specified frequency You can also select different Equalizer types Shapes Frey J6HZz Bain H EG Low Share LJ 12 dE tl ce Peak 127 4 E Shape Select either a Shelving or Peaking equalizer The Peaking type attenuates boosts the signal at the specified Frequency setting whereas the Shelving type attenuates boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting LW Settings shelv Shelving peak Peaking Details about the shapes of the Shelving and Peaking Types are given on Page 111 E Gain Set the Gain This attenuates or boosts frequencies around the Frequency setting Li Settings 12dB 0dB 4 12dB E Freq Frequency Set the center frequency Frequencies around this point are attenuated boosted by the Gain setting Li Settings 32Hz 2 0kHz E Q Frequency Characteristic This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics Li Settings 0 1 12 0 M EQ LowMid Master EQ Low Middle Range M EQ Mid Master EQ Middle Range M EQ HighMid Master EQ High Middle Range These Equalizers cover low to middle middle and high to middle frequency ranges They
51. Number assigned to the Breath Controller L Settings Details are given in the separate Control List E Knob1 2 Set Control Change Numbers assigned to Knobs 1 and 2 on the front panel CTL Assign2 Controller Assign 2 Use Knobs C and 1 to assign Control Change Numbers to the Foot Controller and Ribbon Controller respectively The selected function is shown on the left of the display Control Change Control Change Name Number EEE zl 5E Common CFootCtr l 22 SHIFT PAGE A 59 PART ELEMENT DATA E FC Foot Controller Assign a Controller Change Number to the Foot Controller The Foot Controller is connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack on the rear panel Page 13 L Settings Details are given in the separate Control List E RB Ribbon Controller Assign a Control Change Number to the Ribbon Controller Li Settings Details are given in the separate Control List You can assign any of five different Equalizer bands to the entire Performance The following five screens are available EQ Low EQ LowMid Low Middle Range EQ Mid Middle Range EQ HighMid High Middle Range EQ High Q Frequency Characteristic Freq Frequency EQ Low This Equalizer covers low frequencies You can adjust the signal level at the specified frequency You can also select different Equalizer types Shapes MEQEGLows Share Gain Frey E Common Peak 1 2dEB SHHz 12 4 E Shape Selec
52. PAGE knob to switch to the ARP You can choose from 128 different Arpeggio Type Arpeggio Type screen Type presets You can also freely vary the Arpeggio Tempo to suit the song The Note ARPETaPe Ture Temgg Switch Hold Limit parameter can be used to define the effective note range of the arpeggio Each parameter applies to and is stored with gt O PART ELEMENT SHIFT PAGE A DATA each Voice or Performance By playing notes on the keyboard and listening to the arpeggio you If you use the PAGE knob while holding down the can adjust these parameters by ear SHIFT key a menu will be displayed You can quickly jump to the ARP screen by using the The arpeggiator s parameters are available in PAGE knob to move the cursor to the ARP item each Edit Mode In the following Voice Mode in the menu then releasing the SHIFT key Page example the Arpeggio Type is set for a Drum 65 Voice in Preset Drum 1 Use Knob B to jump to the Type parameter To select the Preset Drum press the MEMORY Now use Knob B the DATA knob or the PRE2 key while holding down the MEMORY INC YES and DEC NO keys to select the PRE1 key and press a PROGRAM key Here we desired Arpeggio Type Let s choose will choose Preset Drum 1 so you should press the BigBeat2 here PROGRAM 1 key If the Arpeggiator switch is already enabled for the Arpeggio Types are divided into the four following categories and applications are not just li
53. Pass Filter 12dB oct High Pass Filter LPF24D Low Pass Filter 24dB oct Digital LPF24A Low Pass Filter 24dB oct Analog LPF18 Low Pass Filter 18dB oct LPF18S Low Pass Filter 18dB oct Staggered LPF6 HPF Low Pass Filter 6dB oct High Pass Filter HPF24D High Pass Filter 24dB oct Digital HPF12 High Pass Filter 12dB oct BPF6 Band Pass Filter 6dB oct BPF12D Band Pass Filter 12dB oct Digital BPFW Band Pass Filter Wide BEF6 Band Elimination Filter 6dB oct THRU Bypass Filters To generalize there are basically four types of filter an LPF Low Pass Filter an HPF High Pass Filter a BPF Band Pass Filter and a BEF Band Elimination Filter Each available filter has a different frequency response There are also combinations of LPF and HPE e LPF Low Pass Filter This only passes signals below the Cutoff frequency You can then use the Reso Resonance parameter to add further character to the sound Six types of LPF are available Level 6db oct 12db oct 18db oct 24db oct Cutoff Frequency 78 LPF24D Low Pass Filter 24dB oct Digital A 4pole 24db oct dynamic LPF with a strong Resonance Resonance LPF24A Low Pass Filter 24dB oct Analog A 4 pole 24db oct dynamic LPF with a character similar to those found on analog synthesizers S Resonance LPF18 Low Pass Filter 18dB oct A 3 pole 18db oct dynamic LPF LPF18S Low Pass Filter 18dB oct
54. Rev Reverb EFF Cho Chorus EFF InsEF Insertion Effect E InsEF Connect Insertion Effect Connect Set up the connection between Insertion Effects 1 and 2 If you change this setting the symbol denoting the signal routing to the left of the setting also changes to reflect the new signal flow Signal routing symbols InsEF Connect ZiT k l 1 2 parallel 1 2 serial 2 1 serial Settings 1 2 parallel 1 2 Insertion Effect 1 to 2 2 1 Insertion Effect 2 to 1 EFF EF1 2 Insertion Effect 1 2 You can select the Effect Category for Insertion Effect 1 2 with the Ctgry parameter and the Effect Type with the Type parameter After selecting the Effect Type you can set its parameters by pressing the ENTER key 73 EFFGEFY CtLdry Tyre C 123 POLY DelaaLCE DryWet CEHTER D lt W63 to Edit E Ctgry Effect Category Set the Category of the Effect Select a desired Category and press the ENTER key The first Effect Type in that Category will automatically be recalled Li Settings Details are given in the Effect Types list of the separate Data List E Type Effect Type Set the type of Effect While the Category indicator is blinking in the display you can press the ENTER key to recall the first Effect Type in that Category Li Settings Details are given in the Effect Types list of the separate Data List E Dry Wet Set the mix level of the wet signal which has been passed through the
55. Reverb and Chorus sEF 2 InsEF Connect ZiT k 1 2 47 OSC Oscillator Screens In these screens you can mainly set the parameters controlling the waveforms on which the Voice is based You can select the Wave used for the Element the volume and note range of each Element and so on e OSC Wave Select the waveform Wave used for each Element OSCEWa we t Humber CLdarg EL1i 34 HRLICPR Grand 1 J e OSC Out e OSC Pan Set the volume output level and stereo pan position of each Element The following illustration shows the logic OSCAQut Level Delay InsEF EL1234 36 5 ins OSCEP arn Pan Alter Fandom Scale EL1 Z234 L 4 63 63 Mixer Pan Stereo Level of aS Elements 1 2 t e OSC Limit Set the note range for each Element the range of notes on the keyboard over which the Element will sound and also the velocity response the range of note velocities within which the Element will sound You can assign different settings for each Element With these parameters you can layer Elements and control their output For example you could set one Element to sound in an upper range of the keyboard and another Element to sound in a lower range Thus even within the same Voice you can have two different sounds for different areas of the keyboard or you can make the two Element ranges overlap so that their sounds are layered over a set range Furthermore you can set each Element to
56. Staggered Also a 3 pole 18db oct dynamic LPF but with a shallower frequency curve Resonance LPF18 LPF18S LPF12 Low Pass Filter 12dB oct A 2 pole 12db oct dynamic LPF designed to be used in combination with an HPF High Pass Filter S Resonance LPF6 Low Pass Filter 6dB oct A 1 pole 6db oct dynamic LPF with no Resonance designed to be used in combination with an HPF High Pass Filter e HPF High Pass Filter This only passes signals above the Cutoff frequency You can then use the Reso Resonance parameter to add further character to the sound Two types of HPF are available Level 12db oct 24db oct Cutoff Frequency HPF24D High Pass Filter 24dB oct Digital A 4 pole 24db oct dynamic HPF with a strong Resonance Resonance HPF12 High Pass Filter 12dB oct A 2 pole 12db oct dynamic HPF Resonance e BPF Band Pass Filter This only passes a band of signals around the Cutoff frequency The width of this band can be varied Three types of BPF are available Level Cutoff range 4 Cutoff range Range passed 4 l Center frequency Frequency BPF6 Band Pass Filter 6dB oct The combination of a 6dB oct HPF and LPF Level Cutoff range Cutoff range Range passed Frequency BPF12D Band Pass Filter 12dB oct Digital The combination of a 12dB oct HPF and LPF Level Cutoff Range 4 Range passed
57. Switch you can also use your feet to control parameters to change Program Number and so on Page 43 Also you can assign parameters to Knobs A B C 1 and 2 on the front panel below the LCD using your right hand to play a melody line YAMAHA a Do SP o0 bob OIO 0 0 00O o ff pgg ggogHgHoauU CC JC ICICICICI ll UH The parameters for these features can be stored per Voice Performance 35 e Turn Knob A fully anti clockwise until 1 Arpegg H ator Common is displayed on the bottom line Voice The arpeggiator is particularly suited to Edit Mode consists of two different Edit screens dance techno music genres You can assign any Common Edit for parameters common to all of 128 Arpeggio Types to each Voice Drum keys Elements and Drum key Element Performance and adjust the tempo You can also Edit The Arpeggiator parameters are found in set the Arpeggio Mode the way in which the the Common Edit screens that you have now arpeggio is played back when you press a note selected and Play Effects to create your own original grooves Arpeggio information can be Connon Er Rack KIE I transmitted through the MIDI Out 2 oe 4 Selecting and Playing Back 7 PART ELEMENT DATA a n A r Pegg lO Ty Pe eoccccccccccee Use the
58. Time Release Time Set the Release Time Li Settings 0 127 Voice Mode spow DN E Level Release Level This shows the Release Level Fixed at zero Amplitude Envelope Generator Settings There are four Time settings controlling the speed of changes in output level and five Level settings controlling the output level The output level changes from the Initial Level to the Attack Level 127 within the Attack Time It then changes in accordance with the Decay 1 2 Time and the Decay 1 Level and settles at the Sustain Level When the note is released the output level falls to the Release Level zero within the Release Time Velocity Sensitivity and other parameters can also be set if required Release Level Attack Decayi Sustain Level Level Level Key off Level a a ___ Time Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release Time Time Time Time AMP KeyFlw AMP Key Follow You can set Amplitude Key Follow parameters for each Element This parameter controls the AEG behavior according to the positions of notes on the keyboard The availability of the Amplitude Key Follow parameter depends on the Break Point and Offset settings in the AEG Scale screen AMNPRRe YF lwaLlevel Center EL123 207 EGT ime Center CCG 3 63 C 3 E Level Set the Amplitude Key Follow ratio the amount by which the output level varies according to note position for each Element A Center setting of C3 is
59. able to select Part17 to Part32 Voice Parts 17 to 32 A mark is displayed to the right of the bar graph indicating that there are more Parts available If you select Part17 to Part32 the bar graph shows the settings for those Parts PFM HIlt Wolume L ok Partai iz E m l a n FFM MI E Wolume Parti iz E Sell_stelelllese_oe_ _ Part17 Part32 105 E 3rd Screen PFM Mit Volume Performance Multi Volume Set the output level volume of each Part PFM M1t9 Wolume Fart iz r L 1 U E l T a n Li Settings 0 127 E 4th Screen PFM Mit Pan Performance Multi Pan Set the stereo pan position for each Part PFM Mlt Pan L Fart l Les E E l T a n I Settings L63 C R63 E 5th Screen PFM Mit RevSend Performance Multi Reverb Send For each Part set the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect 1 2 or the bypassed signal to the Reverb effect FFH MltakeySend Fart lr L art l O E l a n Li Settings 0 127 E 6th Screen PFM Mit ChoSend Performance Multi Chorus Send For each Part set the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect 1 2 or the bypassed signal to the Chorus effect PFA M1ltoachoSend L Fart l iz E E l T a n Li Settings 0 127 E 7th Screen PFM Mit NoteSft Performance Multi Note Shift Set the amount in semitones by which the pitch of each Part is offset You can adjust the offset u
60. al number and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your pur chase Model Serial No Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92 BP bottom PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference A WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include but are not limited to the following Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way The instrument contains no user serviceable parts If it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel Do not expose the instrument to rain use it near water or in damp or wet con ditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power A CAUTION switch disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel Use the specified adaptor PA 5C or an equivalen
61. and DEC NO keys to enable disable the Elements which the Controller will affect Affected Elements are shown by number LI Settings Elements 1 to 4 enabled 1 to 4 displayed or disabled displayed This is disabled if the Dest parameter is set to 00 to 33 E Depth Set the amount by which the parameter selected in Dest can be controlled Ll Settings 64 0 63 Example of Control Set Assignment Using Control Sets 1 to 6 you can assign individual Src Source controllers to multiple Dest Destination parameters or multiple Src controllers to individual Dest parameters Ex 1 Use a single Src controller to control multiple Dest parameters SET1 SET2 Src Src MW Modulation Wheel MW Modulation Wheel Use the Modulation Wheel to change both the Pan and LFO speed parameters PAN simultaneously Ex 2 Use multiple Src controllers to control a single Dest parameter SET1 SET2 Src Src KN2 Assignable Knob 2 Use either Assignable Knob 1 or 2 to change the pan parameter KN1 Assignable Knob 1 Details about Control Set Assignments are given in the Basics Section of this manual Page 40 Common LFO Low Frequency Oscillator There are various settings for the LFO The LFO is used to generate low frequency signals and can be used to create vibrato wah tremolo and other effects when applied to pitch filter amplitude etc parameters For example variations ca
62. and Knob 1 to select the Board Voice OSCEASSi13n2 Elem Bank Humber HORM BA 1 128CGndPiancod E Bank Select the Board Voice Bank of the Plug in Voice I Settings Depends on the Plug in Board Refer to the Owner s Manual for your Plug in Board E Number Select the Board Voice Number The Board Voice Name is displayed to the right of this number I Settings Depends on the Plug in Board Refer to the Owner s Manual for your Plug in Board OSC Veloci Here you can set the velocity and note shift for the Board Voice OSCAWVelocity3 Derth Offset Note Sft Elem 1277 5 24 E Depth Set the velocity sensitivity of the Board Voice If you set a larger value the volume increase will be greater the harder you play the keyboard Li Settings 0 127 E Offset Set an offset value for the velocity sensitivity of the Board Voice When you press a note on the keyboard this offset value is added to the note velocity Li Settings 0 127 E NoteSft Note Shift Set the amount in semitones by which the pitch of the Board Voice is shifted You can set a value of up to 2 octaves Li Settings 24 0 24 Oscillator Veloci You can set the Pitch Envelope Generator parameters for the Board Voice The Pitch Envelope Generator controls the change in pitch from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released Voice Mode spow DN PCH PEG Pitch Envelope Generator
63. be returned to Performance Play Mode You can press the DEC NO key to cancel the Job This will return you to the original screen In this Mode you can play back the built in demo songs and Song files stored on Memory Card Up to 100 Song files can be played back end to end by using the Chain Step feature This Chain Step data can also be saved to Memory Card A Memory Card containing Song files must already be slotted in the Card Slot Basic details about the sequencer are given on Page 26 When you enter Sequence Play Mode you will see the lst screen Demo Song The following two screens are available 1st screen SEQ Demo Sequence Demo 2nd screen SEO Sequence Chain If you load Sequence Chain data in Card Mode Page 138 or using the Auto Loading feature Page 136 the 2nd screen will be displayed first Details about how to enter Sequence Play Mode are given on Page 17 SEQ Demo Sequence Demo The Demo Song data is contained in internal memory When you attempt to enter the SEQ Demo Sequence Demo screen you will have an alert screen shown below since you lose your data for System internal Voices by loading the demo song SEQ Demos Are you sure CYESIJI CHOI gt gt Systems Intloice will be changed Press the YES key to accept the alert and proceed to the SEO Demo screen You can play the demo song in this screen Demo Song Name SEQ Demo Sona DEMOSOMG 1 t ei 126 Demo S
64. be overwritten but can recalled at any time EXT external is stored on a Memory Card RAM inserted in the CARD slot If there is no Memory Card inserted and you attempt to select an EXT Performance will be displayed and no sound will be produced With a Memory Card inserted you can select and play EXT Performances Select a Performance Number using the DATA knob or the INC YES and DEC NO keys Turn the DATA knob clockwise or press the INC YES key to increment the Performance Number Turn it anti clockwise or press the DEC NO key to decrement the Performance Number FFM Play IMT 61 AB190 iInit Perf J E iLow G EGMid G EGHi G SHIFT PAGE A DATA 000000 PART ELEMENT EF MASTER OBypassOKEYBOARD EXIT ENTER DEC NO INC YES You can now play Parts in the Performance via the keyboard If the Layer Switch Page 117 parameter is switched on for any Parts those Parts can be play in unison Now try selecting other Performances Details about selecting Performances using the DATA knob or the DEC NO and INC YES keys are given on Page 61 You can also select Performances using a combination of BANK and PROGRAM PART keys or using the Category Search feature Details about selecting Performances are given on Page 104 On selection a Performance may take a few seconds to become ready since the settings for multiple Parts are applied With some of the Performance presets INT you
65. cha C 3 Turning the PAGE knob while holding down the SHIFT key enables you to scroll though parameters in the Menu screens page 106 53 Select 4zone for the Mode parameter using the Knob B If Master Keyboard Mode is deactivated without the MASTER KEYBOARD key pressed the Mode parameter value will be shown in brackets like 4zone Select one of Zone01 to Zone04 using the Knob A As we have selected 4zone for the Mode parameter you can now select setting screens for four Zones Select ZoneO1 to get started with the settings MIDI ME BET ansmits Al or TrneCh TG fone Chel or You can also use the BANK A to D keys to respectively select Zone01 to Zone04 Selecting a Zone opens the MKB Transmit page You may want to select a sub screen to set up a Zone using the PAGE knob But you first specify basic items in the MKB Transmit page such as MIDI transmit channel enabling or disabling MIDI output to the internal tone generator and to the MIDI OUT connector OSet MIDI transmit channel TrnsCh to Ch01 using the Knob C Set MIDI output to the internal tone generator TG and MIDI OUT MIDI both to on These settings can differentiate each Zone from one another to internally or externally output performance made in each Zone using a separate MIDI channel Finally you will separately control sound tones from four Zones To do t
66. each Element EQ Type EQ Param EQ Parameter EQ Type EQVET sre Tyre EL1i 3 EG LH E Type Select the Equalizer Type Various Equalizers are available which can be used not just for altering existing sounds but also in generating completely new sounds Some items in the following EQ Param EQ Parameter screen may or may not be available depending on the selected Equalizer Type T Settings EQ L H EQ Low High P EQ Parametric EQ Boost6 Boost 6dB Boost12 Boost 12dB Boost18 Boost 18dB thru The parameters for the Filter Type are as follows EQ L H EQ Low High This is a Shelving Equalizer which combines a High Frequency and Low Frequency Band to adjust the signal Level If you select this Filter the EQ Parameter screen will be available with the following parameters wa e e Loain HiFres HiGain Li 3 25r OHz 32 2okHz a Frequency Low Freq High Freq E LoFreq Low Frequency Set the low frequency of the Shelving filter Frequencies below this point are attenuated or boosted by the Low Gain parameter Li Settings 50 1Hz 2 00kHz E LoGain Low Gain Set the amount by which the frequencies below the Low Frequency setting are attenuated or boosted Ll Settings 32 0 32 E HiFreq High Frequency Set the high frequency of the Shelving filter Frequencies above this point are attenuated or boosted by the High Gain parameter LI Settings 503 8Hz 10 1kHz E HiGain Hig
67. granted by the FCC to use the product IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accessories and or anoth er product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the require ments listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assur ance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment gen erates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regula tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA NEDERLAND THE NETHERLANDS Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back up This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back up Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing Yamaha Music Nederland Service Af
68. however each section can overlap to one another You can even set a section to cover or include other sections In the following example Zone 1 is set up for performance by the Arpeggiator Zone 2 for bass sound Zone 3 manual solo performance and Zone 4 for playing an external MIDI tone generator Also in this settings Zones 3 and 4 overlap in the same range and entire performance in four all zones is output from the MIDI OUT connector so that you can record that performance on an external MIDI sequencer You can make this configuration in the following steps Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 An external MIDI tone generator Manual solo performance Bass Sound Performance Performance with Arpeggiator MIDI OUT MIDI IN Ch4 Performance with an external MIDI tone generator MIDI THRU Recording entire performance in Zones 1 to 4 An external MIDI sequencer Before you set up a 4 Zone configuration in the following procedure edit and prepare necessary Voices for Arpeggiator and manual play in their associated Edit Modes Press the PERFORM key followed by the EDIT key each LED will light to enter Performance Edit Mode Then press the MASTER KEYBOARD key to activate Master Keyboard Mode the LED will light Select Common using the Knob A then open the GEN M Kbd General Master Keyboard screen using the PAGE knob GEHEN kbd Mode Lower UrFer Point Commor sF1it cheH1
69. necessary Press the PLAY STOP key to play back the Song from the set position or from the beginning When the Chain Step playback has finished the Song of the next Chain Step Number will automatically be started Songs can be played back continuously this way Press the PLAY STOP key again to stop the chained playback Also if an end or stop Chain Step is reached playback will stop Utility Mode The parameters in Utility Mode are explained here Utility Mode can roughly be divided into a screen for settings common to the entire system a screen for Voice Mode settings and a screen for Plug in Board settings You will first see the following screen when you enter Utility Mode Each of the three Utility Mode screens contain further sub screens Basically the PAGE knob is used to switch between parameter screens and Knobs B C and 1 2 are used to set the values for each parameter You can also use the DATA knob or the DEC NO and INC YES keys to enter values Sys System System settings HSTE TG Ilol HoteShift Tune Sys 127 274 162 3c e Master e Control e MIDI Vce Voice Voice Mode settings H EQ Low Share Gain Frey tl Wie Peak 1276 26Hz 12 4 e Master Equalizer e Control Plg Plug in Plug in Settings PLG MIDI Clock Deve PLG158 AH ori all e Plug in Board MIDI e Plug in Board System Details about how to enter Utility Mode are given on Page 17 When you
70. of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should consult an audiologist IMPORTANT The louder the sound the shorter the time period before damage occurs some Yamaha products may have benches and or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures where applicable are well secured BEFORE using Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only No other uses are recommended NOTICE service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works when the unit is operating as designed are not covered by the manufacturer s warranty and are therefore the owners responsibility Please study this manu al carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them meet these goals In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law we want you to be aware of the following Battery Notice This product MAY contain a small non rechargeable battery which if applicable is soldered in place The average life span of
71. or its subsidiaries class B ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning ma kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent tyo som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enlight fabrikantens instruktion VAROITUS Paristo voi r j ht jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoas taan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit k ytetty paristo valmis tajan ohjeiden mukaisesti lithium caution MopULARSYNTHESIS PLuc INSYSTEM Analog Physical Modeling Plug in Board PLG150 AN Reproduce the fat and funky sounds of vintage analog synths This board gives you a synth engine similar to the one featured in Yamaha s amazing AN1x Analog Physical Modeling Synthesizer On top of its full array of wave algorithms resonant filters LFOs and envelope generators it also has distortion and a 3 band equalizer With the PLG150 AN project and professional studios alike will be able to produce the killer synth sounds featured in today s hot dance tracks Tone Generator Type AN Analog Physical Modeling Synthesis Polyphony 5 notes Voice 256 Preset 128 User Effect Guitar Amp Simulator Distortion 3 Band EQ XG Part EQ Interface Plug in Connector 15 pin digital I F connector Dimensions W
72. play in Voice Edit Mode before you set up a Split setting in the following procedure page 63 Press the PERFORM key followed by the EDIT key each LED will light to enter Performance Edit Mode Then press the MASTER KEYBOARD key to activate Master Keyboard Mode its LED will light Select Common using the Knob A then open the General Master Keyboard GEN M Kbd page using the PAGE knob UrFer Point GEHEN Kbd gt Mode Lower li cha C 3 Commor sFlit chi Turning the PAGE knob while holding down the SHIFT key enables you to scroll though parameters in the Menu screens page 106 Select split for the Mode parameter using the Knob B If Master Keyboard Mode is deactivated without the MASTER KEYBOARD key pressed the Mode parameter value will be shown in brackets like split Select the value split point for the Point parameter using the Knob 2 which determines the key note that divide the keyboard into two sections Select C3 for this example You can specify the split point by directly pressing a specific key on the keyboard while holding down the SHIFT key In this example press C3 while holding down the SHIFT key OSpecify MIDI transmit channels respectively for the lower and upper key ranges using the Knob C lower and the Knob 1 upper These settings can make MIDI channel based separate controls of the internal tone generator or an external
73. respond to different velocity ranges so that one Element sounds for lower note velocities whereas another Element sounds for higher note velocities OSCBLimit 3 Hote Limit Wel Limit EL1 34 C 2 G amp 12r ea Element 1 Element 4 PCH Pitch and PEG Pitch EG Screens Set the basic pitch parameters for each Element You can detune Elements apply Pitch Scaling and so on Also by setting the PEG Pitch Envelope Generator you can control how the pitch changes over time e PEG Pitch Envelope Generator Using the PEG you can control the transition in pitch from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the point at which it is released As illustrated below the Pitch Envelope consists of five Time transition speed parameters and five Level pitch parameters This is useful for creating automatic changes in pitch Furthermore different PEG parameters can be set for each Element PEGETimes Hold Attack Decayl Decay EL1I234 Ler 127 Lei Ler Attack Decay Sustain Release Level Level Level Key off Level Pitch Hold Level 0 es Time Hold Attack Decay Decay2 Release Time Time Time Time Time Details about PEG parameters are given on Page 76 O FLT Filter and FEG Filter EG Screens You can use the filter to change the tonal characteristics of each Element by adjusting overtones harmonic tones included in the waveform from the Element There are several
74. screens you will see the indicator meaning that there are more screens to follow but none before it At the last screen you will see the indicator meaning that there are no more screens to follow Indicator LFO Dertha EL1 234 SHIFT Ke If you hold down the SHIFT key in Voice Play Mode you can modify the parameters on screen as follows COct 33 PREL 126CH16 CPP GrandPianad CTch 13 SHIFT PAGE DATA 2600066 PART ELEMENT Some Modes have more screens In this case you can use the PAGE knob while holding down the SHIFT key to switch to a specific screen For example if you use the PAGE knob while hoilding down the SHIFT key in Voice Edit Mode the following screen is shown Select a specific item using the cursor then release the SHIFT key to switch to the parameter screen for that item Cursor GEMEOthers Com gt GEL EL1 234 QED PARF CTL LEO EFF Elem 205C2PCH FLT SAMP LFO ER SHIFT PAGE DATA e 8680600 PART ELEMENT The SHIFT key also has other functions as described in other sections in this manual PROGRAM PART ke In Voice Edit Mode PROGRAM PART ice can be used to select the items shown under the keys and to switch to their screens Moo GENERAL QED ARPEGGIO CONTROL COMLFO EFFECT BeBe eaeaao PITCH FILTER AMPLITUDE EXIT Ke Press the EXIT hey to move up exit in the hierarchical structure and return to the previous screen
75. subdirectory use Knob C to move the cursor to it and press the ENTER key All the files in the subdirectory are displayed If you select File Number 000 up dir will be displayed By pressing the ENTER key you will be returned to the parent directory i e moved up one directory level 140 Before you can use a new Memory Card with the synthesizer you will need to format it Pres CENTER Format i ar Insert a new Memory Card into the CARD slot When you press the ENTER key you will see a confirmation message Press the INC YES key to start formatting the Card You will see the Executing message while the Card is being formatted A Ai If there is already data on the Memory Card it will be completely lost when you format it Do not remove the Memory Card while it is being formatted since this could result in damage to the synthesizer and the card After formatting an EXT Memory file will automatically be created During this process the message Now saving will be displayed About the Plug in Boards Optional A variety of optional Plug in boards sold separately let you How to Inesta ihe expand the voice library of your instrument The following types of Plug in boards can be used with your instrument Optional Plug in Beard PLG150 AN PLG150 PF Turn the keyboard power off and disconnect the AC PLG100 XG power adaptor Also if the keyboard is connected wi
76. taken by the signal from an Element in Voice Mode Tone Generator Section OSC AMP Oscillator PITCH FILTER 7 n y To Effects Units Outputs the Controls the Changes the Controls the waveform of pitch of each tonal quality of output level each Element Element output each Element amplitude of Each Voice from OSC output from each Element consists of up to PITCH four Elements output from FILTER The signals are then sent at this level to the Effects Units About the Tone Generator The tone generator section in the S30 consists of AWM2 and Plug in units AWM2 Advanced Wave Memory 2 is a synthesis system based on the use of sampled waveforms and is used in many Yamaha synthesizers For extra realism each AWM2 Voice uses multiple samples of a real instrument s waveform Furthermore a wide variety of envelope generator filter modulation and other parameters can be applied to the basic waveform AWM2 is not just limited to general musical instruments Normal Voices It can also be used for setting up percussive instruments Drum Voices Details about Normal and Drum Voices are given on Page 32 Plug in Boards add more features to the system When installed they combine perfectly with the synthesizer s built in tone generator section The following types of Plug in Board are available and can be in the synthesizer These boards are not simply a source of more Voices the
77. that consists of up to four Parts Page 117 Anou Mote Tai Eey Mn a Note Limit setups are provided for setting Master Keyboard Mode Part and Voice They are associated to one another as follows MKB Note Key range for each Zone LYR Limit Key range for an assigned Voice TA OSC Limit Element 1 AMANN Element 2 ANN Element 3 AUTOT Elementa AA While using in Master Keyboard Mode you can control the internal tone generator or an external MIDI device according to Note Limit in the MKB Note screen If you limit a Zone s key range to two octaves it is as if you connect an external two octaves keyboard controller to play with the tone generator Meanwhile the key range playable range of an entire Voice is determined by Note Limit in the LYR Limit screen page 117 for a Part assigned with that Voice Such a playable range of each Element of a Voice is determined by Note Limit in the OSC Limit screen page 75 available in Voice Edit Mode About the Control Sliders While Master Keyboard Mode is turned on the Control Sliders 1 to 4 on the front panel are respectively linked to Zones 1 to 4 When these Sliders for instance are set to control volumes for their corresponding Zones you can use them like a mixer s channel faders to balance volumes of Zones These Sliders can separately work so that you can assign a different control function to each of them
78. the EF BYPASS key been set to OFF Page 51 e Has the Insertion Effect Element Switch parameter in the EFF screen of Voice Edit been set to ON Also in this Mode has the effect type been set to something other than thru or off Page 73 e For Performances have the Insertion Effect Parts been specified Page 112 e For Reverb and Chorus have the effect types in the Common Edit screens been set to ON Pages 74 113 The Element switches do not work for the Control Set e Have Element specific parameters been selected as Dest Destination Page 70 Cannot find the Drum Voice e Drum Voices are selected differently to Normal Voices Page 61 Cannot enter small values e Have you only tried entering values using Assignable Knobs A to C or Knob 1 2 Page 19 Cannot move the cursor without the settings being affected e Hold down the SHIFT key while using Knobs A to C Knob 1 2 and the DATA knob or the INC YES and DEC NO keys Page 19 Cannot receive bulk data e When using the S80 S30 Voice Editor have you set a sufficient Dump Interval The Dump Interval in the Voice Editor Setup dialog must be set to 10ms or greater Macintosh users Card Filer for Macintosh does not work correctly e Are you using MIDI Time Piece Card Filer is not compatible with MIDI Time Piece You need to disable the use of MIDI Time Piece on the Macintosh Plug in Voices cannot be read into PLG Memory
79. the LFO effect to be faded out after the Hold time has elapsed A higher value means a slower fade out Li Settings 0 127 Low FadeOut value Faster fade out Hold dit FadeOut J Key on High FadeOut value Slower fade out Hold ae FadeOut j Key on LFO Dest1 LFO Destination 1 LFO Dest2 LFO Destination 2 You can assign parameters to be controlled by the LFO Wave and set the LFO Wave Depth amplitude Two Destinations can be assigned and you can choose from several parameters per Destination LFUBDest1 3 Dest Elemsw Derth C 1234 AHE 1234 1 r E Dest Destination Set the parameters which will be controlled modulated by the LFO Wave T Settings AMD PMD FMD RESO Resonance PAN ELFOSpd Element LFO Speed E ElemSw Element Switch Select whether to allow variations in the LFO Wave for each Element Move the cursor blinking using Knob 1 and use the DATA knob or the INC YES and DEC NO keys to enable disable LFO Wave variations for Elements 1 to 4 Enabled Elements are shown by number I Settings Elements 1 to 4 enabled 1 to 4 displayed or disabled displayed E Depth Set the LFO Wave Depth amplitude Li Settings 0 127 You can set two types of Insertion Effects plus two System Effects Reverb and Chorus The following five screens are available EFF InsEF Insertion Effect EFF EF1 Insertion Effect 1 EFF EF2 Insertion Effect 2 EFF
80. the S30 have a hierarchical structure Press this key exit from the current screen and return to the previous level in the hierarchy 3 ENTER key Pages 19 20 While selecting a Memory or Bank for Voice or Performance press this key to determine such a memory location Also use this key to execute a Job or a Store operation 4 DEC NO key Page 19 Use this to decrease the value of the parameter at which the cursor is positioned Also use it to cancel a Job or a Store operation 5 INC YES key Page 19 Use this to increase the value of the parameter at which the cursor is positioned Also use it to execute a Job or a Store operation MODE keys Page 16 Press these to keys to select Voice Performance Utility or other Modes 47 SEO controls Pages 21 125 Press the SEQ PLAY key to enter Sequence Play Mode Here you can play a MIDI file from Memory Card Use the PLAY STOP key to start or stop playback of the currently selected file 8 MEMORY keys Pages 22 24 60 104 Using one of these keys you can select a Voice or Performance Memory Press the ENTER key to select the Memory In Performance Mode the PLG key can be used to select the Plug in Part The PRE1 and PRE2 keys select Common for all Parts 49 QUICK ACCESS key Page 63 When you press the QUICK ACCESS key its LED will light you can use BANK keys A to H to directly select Categories and PROGRAM keys 1 to 16 to qui
81. the keyboard You can switch Arpeggiator Hold on off by using Knob 2 to change the Hold parameter of the ARP Type screen With Arpeggio Hold switched on the Arpeggiator continues to play back after releasing the keyboard leaving your left hand free to perform other tasks such as adjusting the sliders ARPETsFe Tyre Teneo Switch Hold Common Bidbeatzibrk 127 or ort 2 Using Controllers The S30 is equipped with Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels Either of the S30 is equipped with front panel Knobs A B C 1 and 2 with which you can control many different parameters Pitch Bend Wheel This wheel s prime function is to control pitch Roll the wheel upward downward to bend the pitch upward downward The effect can also be reversed Pitch Up t B Pitch Down B Pitch Bend Modulation Wheel Wheel Pitch Bend Range can be set for each Voice The wheel can also be assigned other parameters Page 69 Even if a different parameter is assigned to the wheel Pitch Bend messages are still transmitted through the MIDI Out when it is being used Modulation Wheel The more you roll this wheel upwards the greater the modulation that is applied to the sound Deeper Pitch Bend Modulation Wheel Wheel Modulation depth can also be set beforehand Also the wheel can be assigned different parameters such as Volume or Pan Page 69 Knobs A TB1 1C1 11 1 121 In Voice Performance Play Mode Knobs A
82. the respective BANK keys O QUICK ACCESS A PIANO E PIANO ORGAN GTR BASS_ STRINGS BRASS SYNTH OTHER Use PROGRAM keys 1 to 16 to select the Voice within the specified Category The name of the Voice is displayed nnn nnana nN BD bonne neaaAaN For each BANK A to H Preset Voices are accessed using PROGRAM keys 1 to 12 The remaining four keys PROGRAM keys 13 to 16 are used to access each of four internal Voices Details about Voices are given in the separate Data List By selectively assigning your own selected Voices to the PROGRAM keys 13 to 16 in each BANK you can make use of the Quick Access feature to quickly switch between them and PROGRAM PART keys using the Quick Access feature or using the Category Search feature Details about selecting Voices are given on Pages 60 62 63 23 Playing a Performance In Performance Play Mode you can select and play any of 128 internal and 64 external Memory Card Performances A Performance is a set of Voices used with the built in or an external sequencer Performances also let you set the synthesizer up for multitimbral operation Each Performance can contain up to 16 Parts assigned to different Voices plus an extra Part for a Plug in Board If the Layer Switch Page 117 parameter is switched on for any Parts those Parts can be play in unison Also you can assign multiple Parts to different MIDI channels so that they can be p
83. the slot slowly pushing it all the way in until it is fitted in place Don t insert the Memory Card in wrong direction Don t insert anything other than a Memory Card in the slot e To remove a Memory Card Make sure to turn the instrument off and pull the Memory Card out of the slot AN Always the instrument must be turned off before removing the Memory Card However if the Memory Card s memory is full and you want to exchange it with a new one to save your currently edited data follow the following procedure Before removing the Memory Card be sure to confirm that the Memory Card is not in use or it is not being accessed by the instrument Then pull the Memory Card out slowly by hand If the Memory Card is being accessed a message indicating that it is in use appears on the instrument s display It includes saving loading formatting deleting and making directory Also be aware that the instrument will automatically access the Memory Card to check the media type when it is inserted while the instrument is turned on AN Never attempt to remove the Memory Card or turn the power off during accessing Doing so can damage the data on the instrument Memory Card and possibly the Memory Card itself 135 E Formatting Memory Cards Before using a Memory Card with your instrument it must first be formatted Once it is formatted all data on it will be erased Be sure to check if the data is unnecessary for you or not
84. the synthesizer In Voice Play Mode you can select and play any of these Voices In Performance Play Mode several different Voices known as Parts in this Mode can be layered and played simultaneously via keyboard or a sequencer Four groups of Voices are available Preset 1 Preset 2 Internal and External Another Group Voices is also available if an optional Plug in Board has been installed Voice Play Mode Controllers Playing a Voice 256 Normal 8 Drum Voice Preset Presett Preset2 128 Preset Voices 128 Preset Voices Banks A H Banks A H Tone Generator Controllers Performance Play Mode Sequencer Song play B woe TTET Preset 8 Preset Voices DR 1 8 Drum Voice 31 Plug in PRE1 PRE1 PRE1 PRE2 f PRE2 f PRE2 INT EXT PRE1 PLG A01 f A02 A03 A01 f A02 A03 A01 f A01 A16 A01 Playing a Performance 256 Normal 4 Drum Voice User Internal External 128 User Voice 128 User Voice Banks A H Banks A H 2 User Drum 2 User Drum Voices Voices Plug in 64 Plug in Voice Bank A D An Overview of Voices Waves Each Voice consists of up of up to four Elements Each Element itself uses a high quality waveform Voice Element 1 4 Element Wave form AWM2 553 Preset waveforms Internally there are two Voice Types Normal Voices and Drum Voices Normal Voices are mainly musical instrument type so
85. their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume con trols while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold or heat such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal com ponents Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions radios or speakers since this might cause interference which can affect prop er operation of the other products Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acciden tally fall over Before moving the instrument remove all connected adaptor and other cables When cleaning the instrument use a Soft dry cloth Do not use paint thinners solvents cleaning fluids or chemical impregnated wiping cloths Also do not place vinyl plastic or rubber objects on the instrument since this might discolor the panel or keyboard 3 6 Do not rest your weight on or place heavy objects on the instrument and do not use excessive force on the buttons switches or connectors Use only the stand specified for the instrument When attaching the stand or rack use the provided screws only Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncom fortable vo
86. this type of battery is approximately five years When replace ment becomes necessary contact a qualified service represen tative to perform the replacement This product may also use household type batteries Some of these may be rechargeable Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intend ed for the battery being charged When installing batteries do not mix batteries with new or with batteries of a different type Batteries MUST be installed cor rectly Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in over heating and battery case rupture Warning Do not attempt to disassemble or incinerate any battery Keep all batteries away from children Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area Note Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for bat tery disposal information Disposal Notice Should this product become damaged beyond repair or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end please observe all local state and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead batteries plastics etc If your dealer is unable to assist you please contact Yamaha directly NAME PLATE LOCATION The name plate is located on the bottom of the product The model number serial number power requirements etc are located on this plate You should record the model number seri
87. to each Part as follows PRE U 2 key sccisccsszncccsecivest Common Layer Common PLG key cee PartPL Plug in Part PART keys 1 to 16 PartO1 to Part16 Voice Parts 1 to 16 Use Knob B or the DATA knob or the DEC NO and INC YES keys to adjust the parameter settings for each Part O Repeat steps and for each of the other Parts To avoid losing the settings make sure you store the Performance before exiting to another Mode or selecting another Performance Details about how to store Performances are given on Page 124 Reading the Displayed Settings Screens 3 to 7 have the following functions ala PEM MItt Parte ee a a Common PartPL PartP01 16 1 Parameter shows the parameter settings 2 Part shows the currently selected Part 3 Value shows the setting for the currently selected Part 4 Bar graph shows the settings for each Part as a bar graph Common Layer Common PartPL Plug in Part PartOl Part16 Voice Parts 1 16 5 Layer Switch on off displays a L mark above the bar graph for Parts which have their Layer Switch set to on 6 Mute on off displays a mark above the bar graph for Parts which are muted Press the ENTER key to switch mute on off for the currently selected Part If a multitimbral Plug in board is installed in Plug in Slot PartPL Plug in Part will no longer be available However you will now be
88. to each zone s MIDI Out port L Settings off on MKB Note Master Keyboard Note You can set Octave Transpose Note Limit key range for each zone in Master Keyboard Mode AK BENotesOcLave Transrose Hote Limit fone 1 11 C 2 G amp E Octave Shift the note range of each zone up or down in octaves T Settings 3 0 Default 3 E Transpose Transpose the note range of each zone up or down in semitones T Settings 11 0 Default 11 E Note Limit Set the upper and lower notes in each zone s note range LI Settings C 2 G8 for both upper and lower notes You can also select this parameter by pressing each note while holding down the SHIFT key MKB TxSw1 Master Keyboard Transmit Switch 1 For each zone you can enable disable the transmission of messages for the Pitch Bend Wheel Modulation Wheel Knobs A to C and Knob 1 2 ME BET sSui 3 PE Ml KEnobA C Ernobl 2 zonei off or or or L Settings PB Pitch Bend Wheel off on MW Modulation Wheel off on KnobA C Knobs A to C off on Knob1 2 Knob 1 2 off on MKB TxSw2 Master Keyboard Transmit Switch 2 For each zone you can enable disable the transmission of messages for the Foot Controller and Aftertouch ME BET Sw 3 FC AT zonek i or or L Settings FC Foot Controller off on AT Aftertouch off on MKB TxSw3 Master Keyboard Transmit Switch 3 For each zone you can enable disable the t
89. to C6 Page 32 You can use Drum Common Edit for settings that apply to all Drum Keys in the Drum Voice For individual Waves or Normal Voices settings Drum Key Edit consists of Edit screens for each Wave or Normal Voice With Drum Voice Edit you can use Knob A to switch between the Drum Common Edit and Drum Key Edit screens Drum Common settings HERRERA Attack Decay 65 63 Common Indicatior Drum Key settings Humber Ctar Tyre OSC Abba y Kewell 3 BELCPFSGrand 1 J Wee Drum Key Indicator SHIFT PAGE A ate 00000 PART ELEMENT DATA Menu Display The following is displayed if you turn the PAGE knob while holding down the SHIFT key The menus for the settings are shown below Use the PAGE knob to move the cursor to the item you are looking for Then release the SHIFT key to jump to the screen at which you were previously editing the item Cursor EFFGEF 1 2 Com GEHE ED ARF PCTL EFF Common E kesi 2050 PCH FLT AMF SHIFT PAGE A 0 000009 The PROGRAM PART keys on the S30 can directly select Menus associated to them Page 65 DATA 88 Drum Common General For Drum Voices there is only the one type of Common General shown below The parameters and settings are the same as for Normal Voices Details are given on Page 65 GEN Name General Name Drum Common Quick Edit The following four screens are available for Drum Voice output level and timbre parameters OED Lev
90. to the previous screen The delete operation will be canceled if you press the DEC NO key during execution Card Mode spow pb You can create new directories and subdirectories new directories within existing ones This allows you to store files in separate directories according to File Type Mkbirs WOICEDIFR SUBDIF 1i Cursor Card Dir THERI 3d Directory Name The directory hierarchy can have up to 27 levels You cannot create a directory with the same name as one that already exists The hierarchy display directory path will not be shown if the Memory Card has no directory other than the root directory Use Knob C to select an existing directory and repeat until you have reached the level in the hierarchy at which you wish to create a new directory To create a new directory use Knob 2 to move the cursor Then use Knob 1 or the DATA knob and DEC NO and INC YES keys to enter the new directory name The procedure for renaming files is basically the same as for renaming Voices However you cannot use symbols or lower case characters Details about renaming Voices are given on Page 65 Directory names can only be up to 8 characters long Press the ENTER key to create the directory The message Completed will be displayed after it has been created and you will be returned to the previous screen Directories are denoted by Dir next to the directory name To open a
91. use the PAGE knob while holding down the SHIFT key the following menu will be displayed Use the PAGE knob to move the cursor between items then release the SHIFT key to jump to the selected item Cursor HSTE TG Syst MST CTEL MIDI Sus Woe eh EQSCTRLSPLG PART ELEMENT SHIFT PAGE DATA 127 You can set the overall parameters including volume and pitch which mainly relate to the synthesizer s tone generator section The following four screens are available MSTR TG Master Tone Generator MSTR Kbd Master Keyboard MSTR EF Bypass Master Effect By pass MSTR Other Master Other MSTR TG Master Tone Generator Set the parameters which control the synthesizer s tone generator section HoteShift Tune HSTE TG lol Sys ler 24 102 3c E Vol Master Volume Set the synthesizer s overall volume Li Settings 0 127 E NoteShift Master Note Shift Set the amount in semitones by which the note pitch is shifted This parameter only affects the synthesizer s internal tone generator It does not affect information transmitted via MIDI Li Settings 24 0 24 E Tune Master Tune Adjust the keyboard tuning in 0 1 cent steps Li Settings 102 4 102 3 MSTR Kbd Master Keyboard Set the parameters related to the keyboard HSTE Kd 3 Wel Sys Oct TrnsrPose 3 11 fixed lr E Oct Master Octave Shift Shift the octave range of the keyboard up or d
92. x D x H 138 5 x 89 0 x 8 5 mm 5 9 16 x 3 5 8 x 3 8 Weight 65g 2 302 Virtual Acoustic Plug in Board PLG150 VL The Virtual Acoustic Modular Synthesis Plug in Board lets you create incredibly expressive natural sounding voices by digitally simulating the physical characteristics of acoustic instruments Thanks to its fabulous synthesis architecture extensive realtime performance control of the voices is possible making it the ideal Plug in Board for keyboard soloists Tone Generator Type S VA Self oscillating Virtual Acoustic Synthesis ae Polyphony 1 note monophonic ET Voice 256 Preset ERPE ajaga oo ea Si 7O User ee one p EAN Interface Plug in Connector 15 pin digital I F connector 3 Dimensions W x D x H 138 5 x 89 0 x 8 5 mm 5 9 16 x 3 5 8 x 3 8 Se Weight 56g 2 002 EEN en A 77E0v a D N a kr Piano Plug in Board PLG150 P P er For the serious piano player this Plug in Board is loaded with hundreds of painstakingly sampled piano and keyboard voices from concert grands and uprights to electric pianos and harpsichords Two piano boards can be used together effectively doubling piano polyphony to an incredible 128 notes For professional recording studios that demand authentic piano sound but don t want to bother with a real piano an S80 S30 loaded with the PLG150 PF makes a perfect solution Tone Generator Type AWM2 l Polyphony 64 notes Voice 136 Preset SEE Effe
93. you press The Pan setting is used as the basic Pan position Li Settings 0 127 E Scale Set the amount by which the sound is panned left and right according to the position of the note on the keyboard The Pan setting is used as the basic Pan position at note C3 L Settings 64 0 63 75 OSC Limit Oscillator Limit You can set parameters controlling the note range of each Element and the velocity sScHLimit i Hote Limit ELi2 34 C 7 GS E Note Limit Set the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified range I Settings C 2 G8 for the lowest and highest notes If you specify the highest note first and the lowest note second for example C5 to C4 then the note range covered will be C 2 to C4 and C5 to G8 You can set the lowest and highest notes in the range by pressing notes on the keyboard while holding down the SHIFT key E Vel Limit Velocity Limit Set the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will respond Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range Settings 1 127 for the minimum and maximum values If you specify the maximum value first and the minimum value second for example 93 to 34 then the velocity range covered will be 1 to 34 and 93 to 127 You can set parameters governing the p
94. you will first see the Initialize screen The following four screens are available for each Voice Job Before entering Voice Job Mode and using the Initialize or Recall function you must select the Voice you wish to operate on Page 60 Ist screen VCE Initialize 2nd screen VCE Edit Recall 3rd screen VCE Copy 4th screen VCE Bulk Dump Details about how to enter Voice Job Mode are given on Page 17 Performing a Job Qn Voice Play Mode select the Voice Number you wish to perform the Job on Press the JOB key to enter Voice Job Mode Use the PAGE knob and switch to the screen showing the Job you wish to perform WOE Initializes Job Current WUoice Use Knobs B C and Knobs 1 2 to select the parameter you wish to perform the Job on Alternatively use the DATA knob and the DEC NO and INC YES keys This step is not applicable for Recall and Bulk Dump Jobs When you press the ENTER key you will be prompted for confirmation WCE Initializes lt lt Are You sure CYESJI CNO Pe Press the INC YES key to confirm The message Completed will be displayed when the Job has completed and you will be returned to the original screen Press the DEC NO key to cancel the Job For Jobs that take longer to process you will see the message Executing during processing If you switch off the power to your synthesizer while this message is displayed you risk corrupting
95. your data Press the VOICE key to exit Voice Job Mode and return to Voice Play Mode 100 You can reset initialize all parameters of a Voice to their default settings You can also selectively initialize certain parameters such as Common settings settings for each Element Drum Key and so on Note that this does not return the Voice to its original state prior to editing Instead it is useful when building a completely new Voice from scratch UCE Initializes Job Current WUoice E Select type of parameter to Initialize Use Knob C the DATA knob or the DEC NO and INC YES keys to select the parameter to be initialized The parameters available for initialization will vary depending on the type of Voice currently selected Normal Drum Plug in _i Settings normal Voice Current Voice Current Common Current Element 1 4 Drum Voice Current Voice Current Common data common to all Drum Keys Current Key CO C6 Drum Key CO C6 Plug in Voice Current Voice Current Common Current Element VCE Edit Recall If you are editing a Voice but you do not store it before switching to another Voice the edits you have made will be cleared In such a situation you can use the Recall function to reinstate the edits for the Voice WCE Edit Fecall3 a a cr You can copy Common and Element Drum Key parameter settings from any Voice to the Voice you are editing This is useful if you are creating a Voice and wis
96. 1ME E Used Shows the amount of Memory Card memory used The amount is shown as a percentage in parentheses E Free Shows the amount of free memory on the Memory Card You can save files to Memory Card as follows Tyre File UDICEDIR SUBDIF 1 BILTHEWFILE 52A Saves Card File number of New file name file to be saved Data to be saved File Type E Type File Type LI Settings all all data all voice chain Sequence Chain plugin Details about each File Type are given on Page 136 The Memory Card must be formatted before you can save data to it Page 140 Use Knob B to select the File Type to which the data will be saved To overwrite an existing file use Knob C to select the File Number To save a file with a new name use Knob 2 to move the cursor Then use Knob 1 or the DATA knob or DEC NO and INC YES keys to enter the new file name see next Page If you press the SHIFT key the directory for the currently selected file is displayed Further details are given in the section Card Mode Operations When you press the ENTER key the file will be saved If an existing file will be overwritten when saving a confirmation message will be displayed and the following step will be necessary Card Mode Press the INC YES key to save the file The message Completed will be displayed after it has been saved and you will be returned to the previous scree
97. 2 3 and 10 were being used As an example we will now assign another Part Part 1 to a solo type Voice e At the LYR Mode screen set the Layer parameter for Part 1 to on and make sure it is set to off for Parts 2 3 and 10 If you want to manually play multiple up to four Parts using some Voices from Parts 4 to 9 11 to 16 and a Plug in Part set those Parts Layer Switch parameters to on e At the GEN MIDI screen set the LayerCh Layer Channel parameter to BasicCh The Voice for Part 1 can now be played live using the keyboard When you play a song file bearing the XG GM logo available in the market you may want to install an optional XG Plug in Board on the instrument to enjoy a best playback quality with a wide variety of Voices and Effects Note that you can install an additional XG Plug in Board to double polyphonic notes and Effects In such cases you do not only enjoy the playback of a song but also can mute a specific Part from the song file for a minus one setting which is convenient for practice of solo performance Voice Mode Voice Play This mode is used for playing individual voices stored as 256 on board presets as well as the Internal User Voices External Voices on Memory Card and Plug in Board Voices optional This section explains how to select and play voices Details about the Voice types and the Voice Memories are given on Page 31 Voice Play Mode Di
98. 2 A UTPUT Ako FC7 Press the UTILITY key to enter Utility Mode MODE OVOICE OPERFORM STORE OU OuTILity OcaRD O FQ UI PLAY OEDIT QO JOB STOP U LJ COMPARE Use the PAGE knob to switch to the CTRL Assign2 Voice Control Assign 2 screen Nee ES ott a 55 Ze SHIFT PAGE DATA gt 60 PART ELEMENT Use Knob C to select 01 ModWheel Modulation Wheel CTRL Assign2 FC FE Vice CModWwheel J Hl 22 SHIFT PAGE c DATA 0 66 6 e In Voice Mode the foot controller can now be used to control the same function as that assigned to the Modulation Wheel If the current Voice has a Control Set with a source Src assigned to Modulation Wheel MW and receives a Control Change message of Modulation Wheel a destination Dest parameter for the source MW will be affected with that message The above procedure explains how to set up the Foot Control to control Modulation in Voice Mode To create such a setup for Performance Mode the appropriate settings are found at the CTL Assign2 screen in Performance Edit Mode Switching Between Programs by Foot Switch By connecting an optional Foot Switch Cre as the FC4 or FC5 to the FOOT SWITCH jack on the rear panel of the synthesizer you can switch between Programs without having to use your hands For example if you consecutively arrange the Voices Performances in memory y
99. 28 Normal Voices 2 Drum Voices are treated as a single file and can be saved loaded as such Plug in Voice data is not included J Extension S2V E plugin All Plug in Board data is treated as a single file and can be saved loaded as such Data for Plug in Voice settings are not included _J Extension S2B E chain Sequence Chain Chain data for Standard MIDI Files SMFs are treated as a single file and can be saved loaded as such This data is used for playing back multiple songs in succession J Extension S2C 136 E SMF Standard MIDI Files Format 0 Standard MIDI Files SMFs can be played back in Song Mode However they cannot be saved _J Extension MID The SMF is a standardized sequence file format used by musical instrument manufacturers computer software companies and other parties An SMF can easily be exchanged between SMF compatible sequencers regardless of the manufacturer The following two types of SMF exist though this synthesizer will only play back Format 0 SMFs e Format 0 Data for multiple MIDI channels is contained within a single track e Format 1 Data for multiple MIDI channels is contained within multiple tracks If the SMF you wish to play back is in Format 1 use the included Card Filer software to convert to Format 0 via computer Details of how to convert SMFs are given in the Card Filer documentation in PDF format Details about installing the Card F
100. ANOD O ORN S aA 8 E a I E NE EAE E TE E A EA A AAA I EEEE EA TETA 157 Switching Between Programs by Foot SWwitehi sernessinronisnrnsrnsri 43 pehme Elemens OMON sarsii 46 T Tho Compaen R 64 107 Ee Jah BAM OT aE 64 107 TO HOST Ae at ae E een 8 12 TON EG Tone Envelope Generator erririk 115 TON Fite Tone FIET j eccrcnsiricriean area iE 115 TON Ofer Tone ODETI erorri TENERA 116 TON Portamento Tone Portamento cccccesssceesecessseccessceeesseeeenseees 116 Tooc onerar e aaa eee at Types of Parameters Absolute and Relative cccccccccssessessesseseeeseeees 20 U Usmo thie ea pee or TO ser 38 Using the BANK PROGRAM Keys scsscsceseesseeonrsecseraersenatseesvsnesmeseess 60 104 Usine the Vice a0 eat aran 62 Uone TG CC GSS eE Zo 63 Ua To MO a RAAE dataclierds 17 134 C iin gh ol R E 17 30 127 xipuoddy vV baboa I O r TEEI NE O AE A AE A RE A T A EA AAE 101 pE o A EEE EE TAE EEE ALNE TEL AA I A T N N 100 A E E reo aes 100 EE DE rans a 100 TETO O Aer enee aera need ne TE Re ee eee nner omer rT nenTer Nae mU Ter hr PER CTS Tee el 60 RM ces sateen sone sepvetita E eteeted 16 45 63 TES 00001 ilies poe suacpeasea tants aegsuanesonieniai sonsaeneHaliaciamaaoneaade 17 100 Voice Memory Number Bank Number Display cccccceseeseeeees 59 VOe MOUE srescerpne ee e E E EE 30 59 E Ea PERNO E EIEI OE IEN OAE NEE EAA AATA 60 Voice Play Modo Deploy ai aicarateriaareeerneienscieeiniedeuuen 16 59 vare TOE ON aE 60
101. ART ELEMENT In Performance Mode the connection with the S30 s internal tone generator the signal flow can be changed by pressing the MASTER KEYBOARD key on the front panel If the MASTER KEYBOARD key LED is on the S30 enters Master Keyboard Mode and becomes useful for controlling external tone generators If the LED is off the S30 exits Master Keyboard Mode and becomes useful for controlling its internal Parts from the internal tone generator The signal flow for each Mode is as follows Master Keyboard Mode MASTER KEYBOARD key LED on MIDI IN MIDI channel Octave Transpose Note Limit etc MIDI OUT Part 1 to 16 Part PL Tone Generator Mode MASTER KEYBOARD key LED off MIDI IN i MIDI channel Octave Transpose Note Limit etc MIDI OUT Part 1 to 16 Part PL If you alter any parameters in Performance Edit Mode the B indicator will be displayed in the top left of the screen This gives a quick indication that the current Performance has been modified but not yet stored Edit indicator MIG Parte Com GE Parte MI eure 3 Even if you exit to Performance Play Mode the edited settings for the current Performance will not be lost so long as you do not select another Performance The H indicator will also be displayed in Performance Play Mode The B indicator will also be displayed in Voice Play Mode if any Assignable knobs are used 107 The C
102. B OWNERS J MANU Ji YAMAHA MoDULARSYNTHESIS PLUG INSYSTEM SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply adapter DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual on the name plate or specifically recommended by Yamaha WARNING Do not place this product in a position where any one could walk on trip over or roll anything over power or con necting cords of any kind The use of an extension cord is not recommended IF you must use an extension cord the minimum wire size for a 25 cord or less is 18 AWG NOTE The smaller the AWG number the larger the current handling capacity For longer extension cords consult a local electrician This product should be used only with the components supplied or a cart rack or stand that is recommended by Yamaha If a cart etc is used please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE The information contained in this manual is believed to be cor rect at the time of printing However Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units This product either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker s may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss DO NOT operate for long periods
103. Channel Set the MIDI Channel of the Layer Part All Layer Parts up to four will use the same MIDI Channel set here If you choose BasicCh Basic Receive Channel all Layer Parts will use the Basic Receive Channel set in Utility Mode Page 130 LI Settings 1 16 BasicCh Basic Receive Channel 108 GEN M Kbd General Master Keyboard You can set keyboard splits and layers when using a Performance in Master Keyboard Mode GENMEM Kbd Mode Lower UFeer Point Commar CsPlit chi cha C 3 E Mode Set the keyboard Mode The following three Modes are available If the MASTER KEYBOARD key LED on the front panel is off these Modes are not available and brackets are shown in the display Li Settings split 4zone layer split Splits the keyboard into a left hand lower section and a right hand upper section assigning a different MIDI channel and Part to each section 4zone Splits the keyboard into a maximum of four zones assigning a different MIDI channel and Part to each zone Parameters can be set separately for each zone Page 121 when you press the ENTER key layer Layers up to two Zone Part over the keyboard This is useful for creating rich and thick sounds E Lower When the Mode see above has been set to split this sets the MIDI channel assigned to notes at and below the split point The Part or Voice set to this MIDI channel will be played when you press notes at and below the split poi
104. F Cho Chorus You can select the Chorus Effect Type then press the ENTER key to set its parameters Return CENTER EFFECho Tyre Lokew l 27 to Edit 12734 Chorus 1 1zr E Type Chorus Effect Type Set the Chorus Effect Type Li Settings Details are given in the Effect Types list of the separate Data List E toRev To Reverb Set the Send level of the signal sent from the Chorus Effect to the Reverb Effect Li Settings 0 127 E Return Set the Return level of the Chorus Effect Li Settings 0 127 74 You can set the parameters for the Elements Waves which make up the Voice Each Voice can consist of up to four Elements and the following four screens are available for each OSC Wave Oscillator Wave OSC Out Oscillator Out OSC Pan Oscillator Pan OSC Limit Oscillator Limit OSC Wave Oscillator Wave You can use Knob A to select each Element and Knob C to assign a Wave to it OSCAWawe 3 ELi 34 Humber Ctar HRICPf Grand 1 J E Number Wave Number Select the Wave Number The Category and Wave Name are displayed to the right of the selected Wave Number You can assign a different Wave Number to each of the Elements LW Settings 000 off 553 Details about each Wave are given in the separate Data List E Ctgry Category Select the Category containing the Wave you wish to use Specify a desired Category and press the ENTER key The first Wave in that Category will autom
105. FPFCHGAFEG InitLel Attack Felease Levyel Elen 63 63 63 64 E InitLvl Initial Level Set the Initial Level Ll Settings 64 0 63 E Attack Set the Attack Time Ll Settings 64 0 63 E Release Set the Release Time Ll Settings 64 0 63 E Level Set the Release Level Li Settings 64 0 63 Pitch Envelope Generator Settings You can set two time speed parameters and two level pitch parameters controlling the change in pitch from the moment you press a note on the keyboard to the moment you release it When you press a note on the keyboard the initial pitch is defined by the InitLvl parameter setting The pitch then changes from the InitLvl value to the peak pitch within the time set in the Attack parameter Thereafter the pitch change is defined by the Release Time Level settings Peak Release Level Pitch InitLvl Time Release Time Attack Time Plug in Element EQ Equalizer You can set the equalizer settings for the Wave This is a shelving equalizer with two bands one for high frequencies and another for low frequencies 98 EQ Param EQ Parameter EQGParam2sLoFres Lob Eler 2 k Frequency Low Freq High Freq E LoFreq Low Frequency Set the shelving point for the low frequencies The levels of signals below this frequency will be boosted attenuated by the amount set in the LoGain parameter Li Settings 32Hz 2 0kHz E LoGa
106. G Tone Envelope Generator You can set EG Envelope Generator parameters for each Part There are four parameters governing the transition in output level from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released or the point at which the output level has faded to zero For more information refer to a diagram that illustrate the concept of Envelope Generator which you can find in Voice Edit Mode sections Part 1 to 16 TOHGEG Attack Decay Sustain Felease Partel Plug in Part Multi Plug in Part TOMHGEG gt Attack Decay Release Fart FPL Drum Voice Part TOHGBEG Attack Decay Farti E Attack Set the transition time from the moment a key on the keyboard is pressed to the point at which the output level of the Part reaches its peak A positive value will lengthen the transition time and a negative value will shorten it Li Settings 64 0 63 E Decay Set the transition time from the point at which the output level of the Part reaches its peak to the point at which it levels off A positive value will lengthen the transition time and a negative value will shorten it L Settings 64 0 63 E Sustain Set the output level of the Part maintained while the key on the keyboard is being held down This parameter is not available for Plug in or Drum Voice Parts L Settings 64 0 63 Performance Mode spow SIUDWIOJ 9 E Release Set the tra
107. INGS BRASS Ouse PROGRAM keys 1 to 16 to select the Voice within the specified Category The name of the Voice is displayed B P P aaaNe DD B B pP prepre For each BANK A to H Preset Voices are accessed using PROGRAM keys 1 to 12 The remaining four keys PROGRAM keys 13 to 16 are used to access each of four internal Voices Details about Voices are given in the separate Data List By selectively assigning your own selected Voices to the PROGRAM keys 13 to 16 in each BANK you can make use of the Quick Access feature to quickly switch between them 63 Voice Edit There are three kinds of Voices Normal Voices Drum Voices and Plug in Voices if a Plug in board has been installed The following is an explanation of the parameters used to edit each kind of Voice Details about Voices are given on Page 31 The following is displayed when you enter Voice Edit Mode The displayed screens will vary according to the type of Voice being edited but basically the PAGE knob is used to switch between screens and the parameters on each screen are altered using Knobs A B C 1 and 2 The DATA knob and the INC YES and DEC NO keys can be used to alter parameters in small increments GEH Hames Ctar a z H Cursor C 1234 CFF trait Woice SHIFT PAGE DATA 000000 PART E EMENT sane pages Set the value Choose Common or Elements 1 to 4 While holding down the SHIFT key you can use Kno
108. INT key or vice versa to select the Internal External INT EXT Memory of the User Drum Voice Then use the INC YES or DEC NO keys to select the Drum Voice PRE1 PRE 2 DOO aL DRUM DRUM D DEC NO INC YES e Press the MEMORY EXT key while holding down the MEMORY INT key or vice versa to select the Internal External INT EXT Memory of the User Drum Voice Then use the DATA knob to select the User Drum Voice SHIFT PAGE DATA 0 PART ELEMENT Once you have one User Drum Voice you can easily switch to another by simply using PROGRAM keys 1 to 8 the INC YES and DEC NO keys or the DATA knob Using the Voice Category Search With the Voice Category Search you can quickly find Voices within a specified Voice Category For example if you specify the Pf piano Voice Category and use the Voice Category Search you can select from all the voices which fall into the Pf Voice Category To start the Voice Category Search first turn the PAGE knob to switch to the Voice Search screen If a Plug In board Voice is currently selected in Voice Play Mode there is no Voice Search screen available 62 WCE Srch PREL 128CH1630CPFE Br ati inol Mer Humber Chor Search SHIFT PAGE DATA 5 O9G6000 PART ELEMENT Select a Voice Memory ee sce Select a Search Program Number Turn Knob B to select a Voice Memory Turn Knob 1 to select a Voice Category The Vo
109. LSB Plug in Bank 1 128 There may be a delay when changing programs for a Plug in Part since voice data and default settings need to be sent To change Voices for a Plug in Part in a song you should insert the Program Changes in the less data intensive areas of the song When selecting a Plug in Board Voice you should use the Program Number of the Parameter Change multi part Details are given in the Owner s Manual that comes with the Plug in Board In Performance Mode the Part assignment for a Plug in Board is fixed at 15 for PLG For details about Plug in Voices refer to the Owner s Manual that came with your Plug in Board e If Part17 to Part32 has been selected You can set Voices for Parts 17 to 32 if you have a multitimbral Plug in board installed Use Knob B to select the Voice Bank and Knob C to select the Program Number MI sBUices Bank Number Parti HORM 661 661 AB1 SCPE GrandProad E Bank Number Bank Program Number L Settings Refer to the Owner s Manual that came with the Plug in board This setting is only held temporarily and cannot be stored with the Performance MIX Level You can set output level pan effect send and other parameters for each Part This is useful when setting up the levels of each Part in a mix MI sGLeyvel 3 Lol Pan FeyvSend ChoSend Partel 177 Eq 5 E Vol Volume Set the output level of the Part Li Settings 0 127 E Pan Set t
110. Mode consists of Common Edit screens plus screens for each individual Element s parameters In Voice Edit Mode you can use Knob A to switch between Common settings and settings for Elements 1 to 4 Common settings GEH Others Mode Assign MicroTuning 1234 Fols single 31 Indian Common Indicator Settings for Elements 1 to 4 ASF haye Humber Chor ELiI234 BBICPS Grand 1 J Element 1 4 Indicator SHIFT PAGE A C DATA OOOO 6 PART ELEMENT Elementi ic S S Element2 ie Element3 z Tomon K einen t N Selecting Elements In Voice Edit Mode you can select the Element to edit by pressing the respective BANK key A to D When you select an Element the cursor moves to the respective Element Number Example When Element 2 is selected A DRUM DRUM Uh QUICK ACCESS A B c D E F G C CG EL A PIANO PIANO ORGAN GTR BASS STRINGS BRASS SYNTH OTHER ELEMENT SELECT ELEMENT ON OFF EG ParamsLloFres Lobain HifFres HiGain aan 2rd ZHz 12 2 S2kHz 77 Cursor Switching Elements On Off In Voice Edit Mode an Element can be switched off when you press the respective BANK key E to H This lets you temporarily mute other Elements in the Voice so that you can listen to the changes to the Element that you are editing A muted off Element will be indicated as an asterisk in the display as illustrated below
111. OC cas to E A aed 61 87 E e oat oncascserteunein to peiekntiedswiaaanenenie aadrake aeied uaeaceeanarrpiapieadss 16 Earning Fe Doard VOC Se da wsatdsntinebidadesnansarede usniaavineneateloulans 99 ET aR O 7 Ee a Te CG creak eee ee ence eee ee teen tI er erent en et eRe nerve 74 113 EFF EF1 2 Insertion Effect 1 2 ioiccssacvsusccucnoesnsctecavduassusnstensasssavanecs fo 121 EFF InsEF Insertion FCT vnnccecueisrinmnersoneinaumenmeniseceniens 73 PEE T o a E EE S AEE EEEE liz EFF Roy Terem akae EA 74 113 TT Ret AG ESAS OEE AN ONE D AEA I A EE A A T A N ol Te EP er eE n EE To 113 121 I Se E RE E E A E E E E E O E E E TEE 29 50 Elects in Perr ore Mont cussrrreinier inida EEN 50 Ps a a E EE E A E AEA E 50 Appendix Poman A N ep E E 83 Eoee A EES 78 sd E ane ee ee eect aROEM nat Mevene none oe ar Ore mere Aa teen re ranean 75 Piemont FO Cona scarce hc arsine ewes Sees 86 Element LFO Low Frequency Oscillator ccccccsscsssesssssesssesceseeees 85 Flement OSC Oscilator caceewicceeoccaueewinomvieansoneeaceuieaans 74 E E a eae meme maT ee Nene ere ene Mrnnnn Pere ntrn Writtle nnr ere 19 ET aN arrer st ot T 19 20 A E T E E ens A N S 112 EQ HighMid High Middle Range ccccccccccecccesccesscsssessseesseesesseeseees 112 EQ LOW S 111 EQ Low Mid Low Middle Rage ssscscicressisnicacersiseeiesnnrientiasenines i EO Mid Midde Range cares cosy dcstes ecrneanctnateeacoivicegninseraaacactuauaen 112 EO Para EO
112. OEF OMASI BYPASS KEYBOARD EXIT ENTER DEC NO INC YES The EXIT key also has other more functions as described in other sections in this manual ENTER Key Normally the ENTER key is used to apply parameter settings In some cases however the following screen appears prompting you to press the ENTER key EF MASTER OpypassOXEYBOARD EXIT ENTER DEC NO_ INC YES CEMTER J EFFGEF1 gt Cory Tyre C 1 to Edit 234 MOG Tremolo The ENTER key has other functions as described in other sections in this manual You can use the knobs to directly alter their respective parameters on the screen Alternatively you can also move the cursor F to a parameter and set its value using the INC YES and DEC NO keys or the DATA knob Knobs A B C 1 and 2 Each parameter in a screen is normally associated with a knob A B C 1 or 2 below the display When you use one of these knobs the cursor F moves to its respective parameter and you can change its value For instance you can use Knob B at the following screen to change the Level setting Turn the knob clockwise to increase the value and anti clockwise to decrease it to Level Delay InsEF scapa EL1234 k 96 A ins SHIFT PAGE A DATA 78 00000 PART ELEMENT By using a knob A B C 1 or 2 while holding down the SHIFT key you can move the cursor F to the respective parameter on the screen without affecting it
113. OSC Out Oscillator Out Set the Wave or Normal Voice output settings for each Drum Key E Lengel Ke y C 12 InsEF ReyvSend ChoSend LAr Eq zr E Level Set the output level for each Wave or Normal Voice This can be used to adjust the output of each Drum Key Li Settings 0 127 E InsEF Insertion Effect Select the Insertion Effect to which the output of each Drum Key will be sent If Thru is selected the Insertion Effects are bypassed Settings thru ins Insertion Effect 1 ins2 Insertion Effect 2 E RevSend Reverb Send Set the Send level of the Drum Key signal sent from Insertion Effect 1 2 or the bypassed signal to the Reverb effect Li Settings 0 127 This setting plus the Reverb Send level set in the QED Level screen Page 66 are the final Reverb Send level settings Details about the Effects are given on Page 50 E ChoSend Chorus Send Set the Send level of the Drum Key signal sent from Insertion Effect 1 2 or the bypassed signal to the Chorus effect Li Settings 0 127 This setting plus the Chorus Send level set in the QED Level screen Page 66 are the final Chorus Send level settings For a Drum Key with the Insertion Effect set to other than Thru the Chorus Send level will be determined by the OED Level screen Details about the Effects are given on Page 50 OSC Pan Oscillator Pan Assign Pan settings for each Drum Key in the Drum Voice Different Pan types are avai
114. Paraiiete in E 98 PD Eas R E O ume EAA nee 86 Ps SOF Coe Set Fea tiered 70 EXIT Key ccccssssccccscsssssscccccssssseccssssssssecesssssssscsssssssssesesssssstecsssssssseeceesen 7 18 F Factory Set Restore Factory De 4 ecnaconimmnnnaaennann 134 FEG Lavel Lo opri 81 FEG Pease FEG eee poriocrisisiinas u 81 FE E aaee E EE T EE A 81 PEG Velseus FEG Velogity Sensi sinara nN 80 Ey MS TI A ca capiresisanttalisacsena bund ecedincunaa sau elvaiensans tadiaie tonieadnsuareeau denies 138 L E Kiyo EE TA PEE AE E AAE Mere Wir E tn E P AE ETETA ele te 136 Filter Envelope Generar Seti insurance aati 81 Filter Scaling i iraetececncsorsicenrcerceveoianesmenionssnnanrnineeseaiuaexemaesnscnnsnnontents 82 PET Cat Or CUO ee renerisa seeseeies acne 91 FET BPE et Piss Tillier srna 80 FLET Revi lee Filter Key FOLLOW sursis 81 FLT Seale Filter Seale Break Point sscsicascscssssavocivvavcsavasvaciosvesversesavarcien 82 FLT Seale Filter Seale seh eciccone ainnir i aia 82 EET Sens ter Sems iri eorna 80 PLT Type Piter Type iiini aa EE 78 Pe a A 39 FOOT CONTROLLER Jak cored cineeeetenaeeninedaons 8 Be IAS EETA ESI AA OEE T I ETEA A IEE T E 39 POTo 6 Lc RRR 8 EOLO oers ese daieussick acess egress pap asta tend reed oan E 140 G GEN M Kbd General Master Keyboard sssccsissccssecnarsservicntousatacriancasavces 108 GEN MIDI General MIDI se ceccorsucsocncssconcteovececensaievensiraniiesGeckaceseasucee 108 GEN Name General Nate sisinciisssssiavsti e
115. Program Li Settings 0 127 122 E BankLSB MIDI Bank Select LSB Set the Bank Select LSB transmitted when changing Bank Program Li Settings 0 127 Bank Select is a type of MIDI message transmitted when changing Voice Bank Control Change MSB and LSB messages are combined to form Bank Select messages which are used to specify the Voice Bank These message values will vary according to synthesizer For more details refer to the documentation that came with your synthesizer This setting is not transmitted if the Bank Bank Select parameter at the MKB TxSw4 screen has been set to off E PC MIDI Program Change Set the Program Number transmitted when changing Bank Program Li Settings 1 128 Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127 That is Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1 Remember to take this into consideration This setting is not transmitted if the PC Program Change parameter at the MKB TxSw4 screen has been set to off MKB Assign Master Keyboard Assign You can assign a different Control Slider function Control Change to each zone HEEBASs 19n Al Controls ider zone rC Hain Wold Li Settings off 1 95 Performance Job Mode You can execute various actions Jobs in Performance Job Mode For example you can Initialize Performances including those currently being edited or
116. Puyat Avenue P O Box 885 MCPO Makati Metro Manila Philippines Tel 819 7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd 11 Ubi Road 06 00 Meiban Industrial Building Singapore Tel 65 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 10F 150 Tun Hwa Northroad Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 02 2713 8999 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 121 60 61 RS Tower 17th Floor Ratchadaphisek RD Dindaeng Bangkok 10320 Thailand Tel 02 641 2951 THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation International Marketing Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd 17 33 Market Street South Melbourne Vic 3205 Australia Tel 3 699 2388 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N Z Ltd 146 148 Captain Springs Road Te Papapa Auckland New Zealand Tel 9 634 0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation International Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2445 1 FCC INFORMATION U S A IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority
117. Reverb Chorus Variation Tue Connector Plug in Connector 15 pin digital I F connector a Dimensions W x D x H 138 5 x 89 0 x 8 5 mm 5 9 16 x 3 5 8 x 3 8 Weight 56g 2 002 YAMAHA M D G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Yamaha Corporation 2000 Yamaha Corporation V568500 OOSMWCP25 2 02B0 This document is printed on chlorine free ECF paper with soy ink Printed in Japan
118. T Scale Filter Scale Offset FLTAScales0fstl Ofst Ofsts Of st4 ELi 34 amp F 177 128 E Ofst1 Ofst2 Ofst3 Ofst4 Offset 1 2 3 4 Set the Filter Scaling Offset Levels These Offsets are used by the Break Points BP1 BP2 BP3 BP4 Details about Filter Scaling are given below in the section Filter Scaling Settings L Settings Ofst1 to Ofst4 128 0 127 Filter Scaling Settings By way of example you could set the Levels Offsets and Break Points BP1 to BP4 as follows FLTEScale BFI BPS BPS BP4 ELi234 E I B 2 a 4 Ho FLTGScales0fstl Of stz Of sts Of st4 EL1234 4 18 F 44 Here the current Cutoff setting is 64 The Offsets are 4 at BP1 set to note E1 10 at BP2 set to note B2 17 at BP3 set to note G4 and 4 at BP4 set to A5 That is the Cutoff frequencies at each Break Point are 60 74 81 and 68 respectively For other notes the Cutoff frequencies will be on the straight line connecting the two adjacent Break Points The Break Points are automatically arranged in ascending order across the keyboard For example BP2 cannot be set to a lower note than that of BP1 The Break Point Levels are Offsets used to increase or decrease the current Cutoff setting at the specified notes Regardless of the size of these Offsets the minimum and maximum Cutoff limits values of 0 and 127 respectively cannot be exceeded A note set below the BP1 will become the BP1 Level A note
119. Thru To Host Foot Switch Foot Controller Output L Mono R Phones DC IN Connector for Plug in Board DISPLAY 40 x 2 Backlit INCLUDED ACCESSORIES PA 5C AC Power Adaptor May not be included in your area Please check with your Yamaha dealer Owner s Manual Data List Installation Guide CD ROM PLG150 Plug in Boards Series PLG100 Plug in Boards Series excluding the PLG100 VH FC4 5 Foot Switch FC7 Foot Controller Output 9 0 2dbm 10k ohms Phones 2 0 2dbm 33 ohms Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer xipuoddy 148 0 9 BE i A Oe Ce eT TT mere ner Tee arene ent tr een ae ne 99 A Apon Somnar CS cen 15 135 Aboot Modular Sysnthesis Plug in Systeti sarsii 28 About Note Limit Key Range esssseseereeresiesesresessrssesreresrsrereerrssrsresesses 56 O E E S a S 30 About the Plug in Boards Optional ccccccssscssssssesesessceeoees 27 141 Aponte Tone Gonera eeraa ei 2r E e vile aA 96 120 AC Pe Ce Don Mossin 96 120 E a A A enennenstrt Mae eee 83 AEETI oiar E 83 P NNE T E A ese 83 AEG VelSens AEG Velocity Sensitivity sussend iiini 83 A A A EE 40 AMP AEG Amplitude Envelope Generator ccccsccscscss
120. Troubleshooting The following table provides troubleshooting hints and page references for some common problems Most problems may be simply the result of incorrect settings Before calling for professional service refer to the troubleshooting advice below to see if you can find and correct the cause of the problem e Is the volume set appropriately Pages 6 and 15 e With the S30 if a Foot Controller has been connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack and set up for volume expression control has it been fully depressed Page 13 e Is the Vol volume parameter of the QED Level screen of Voice Edit Common sufficiently high Page 66 e Has the WaveNumber parameter of the OSC Wave screen of Voice Edit Element been set to 000 off Page 74 e Is the Level parameter of the OSC Out screen in Voice Edit Element sufficiently high Page 74 e Have the note range velocity note range of the ZONE OSC screen in Voice Edit been set appropriately Page 75 e Are any of the Elements muted Page 46 e Have the Element filters been set to cut almost all the sound Page 78 e Have the effects parameters been set appropriately Pages 66 73 74 112 e Have the MIDI receive channels been set correctly Pages 117 and 130 e Has the audio equipment been connected correctly Page 9 e Has the Local switch been set to OFF Page 130 e Have the Velocity Sensitivity Note Limit and Velocity Limit parameters been set appropriately Pages 75 97 117 and
121. Voices Details are given on Page 67 ARP Type Arpeggio Type ARP Limit Arpeggio Note Limit ARP Mode Arpeggio Mode ARP PlayEF Arpeggio Play Effect Drum Common Controllers Set your Control Settings here Up to six controllers plus the Pitch Bend wheel can be assigned to each Drum Voice The following seven screens are available The parameter names for all Control Set screens are the same CTL Bend Pitch Bend CTL Set1 Control Set 1 CTL Set2 Control Set 2 CTL Set3 Control Set 3 CTL Set4 Control Set 4 CTL Set5 Control Set 5 CTL Set6 Control Set 6 The parameters are the same as for Normal Voices Details are given on Page 69 The Elem Sw parameter is only available for Normal Voices Drum Common Effects For Drum Voice Effects there are two Insertion Effects plus System Effects Reverb and Chorus The following five screens are available The parameters and settings are the same as for Normal Voices Details are given on Page 73 EFF InsEF Insertion Effect EFF EF1 Insertion Effect 1 EFF EF2 Insertion Effect 2 EFF Rev Reverb EFF Cho Chorus 89 You can change your Drum Voice waveform settings Each Drum Voice can consist of up to 73 Drum Keys Page 32 assigned to notes spread across the keyboard CO to C6 You can assign waveforms to Drum Keys and set their parameters The following four screens are available OSC Wave Oscillator Wave OSC Out Oscillator Out OSC Pan Oscillat
122. ach of which consists of multiple pages e Common General e Common Quick Edit e Common Arpeggio e Common Controller e Common Master EQ e Common Effect Performance Mode spow SIUDWIOJ 9 You can set the Performance Name MIDI channel and other general parameters in the Common Edit screens The following three screens are available for general settings GEN Name General Name GEN MIDI General MIDI GEN M Kbd General Master Keyboard GEN Name General Name You can set a Performance Name consisting of up to 10 characters alphabetic or numeric and or symbols You can also select the Category Name to the left of the Performance Name Category Name Performance Name GENEHame Chory a 7 Cursor C 1234 I E FFR Init Worcell The method of setting the Performance Name is the same as for the Voice Name Details are given on Page 65 GEN MIDI General MIDI You can set the MIDI In Out channel parameters for the Performance GEMEMIDT Arr Out AreCh LayerCh Commor or 1 j Basicth E ArpOut Arpeggio Out Switch the Arpeggiator phrase MIDI output on or off Li Settings off on E ArpCh Arpeggio Channel Set the Arpeggiator s MIDI Channel The arpeggio will play to Parts and Voices set to this MIDI Channel If you choose kbd ch Keyboard Channel the Arpeggiator will use the MIDI Transmit Channel set in Utility Mode Page 130 I Settings 1 16 kbdCh Keyboard Channel E LayerCh Layer
123. aci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panam Panam Tel 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd 61D Sallynoggin Road Dun Laoghaire Co Dublin Tel 01 2859177 GERMANY SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH Siemensstrafe 22 34 25462 Rellingen ER of Germany Tel 04101 3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G 3526KL Utrecht The Netherlands Tel 030 2828411 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8 1930 Zaventem Belgium Tel 02 7258220 Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha mas cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo FRANCE Yamaha Musique France Division Professionnelle BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Combo Division Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Hazen Electronica Musical S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 201 0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S A Navarinou Street 13 P Code 10680 Athens Greece Tel 01 364 7111 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 G teborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Cope
124. ad it uses the actual FM sound generator engine of the DX series synthesizers to give a completely faithful reproduction Sounds are compatible with those of the DX7 and the board can even receive DXT data via MIDI bulk dump e Virtual Acoustic Plug in Board PLG150 VL With Virtual Acoustic VA synthesis the sounds of real instruments are modeled simulated in real time giving a degree of realism that cannot be achieved using conventional PCM based synthesis techniques When playing these sounds using an optional MIDI Wind Controller WX5 you can even capture some of the physical feel of woodwind instruments e XG Plug in Board PLG100 XG This Plug in Board is a 16 part XG sound generator You can play back XG GM song files using the rich variety of sounds and effects on this board More Plug in Boards will be available in future MopULARSYNTHESIS LUG INSYSTEM About MODULAR SYNTHESIS PLUG IN SYSTEM The Yamaha Modular Synthesis Plug in System offers powerful expansion and upgrade capabilities for Modular Synthesis Plug in compatible synthesizers tone generators and sound cards This enables you to easily and effectively take advantage of the latest and most sophisticated synthesizer and effects technology allowing you to keep pace with the rapid and multi faceted advances in modern music production Maximum Polyphony The maximum sonic polyphony is 64 for AWM2 plus the polyphony of the Plug in Board if installed
125. ages received at MIDI IN Connect other MIDI devices here 3 HOST SELECT switch Page 12 Select the type of computer connected to the synthesizer via the TO HOST connector OTO HOST terminal Connect a computer here using an optional serial computer cable Page 12 5 FOOT SWITCH jack Pages 13 39 Connect an optional Foot switch FC4 or FC5 here Using the foot switch you can control of a range of on or off a specific function by foot as assigned on the instrument Pages 43 129 6 FOOT CONTROLLER jack Pages 13 39 An optional foot controller FC7 etc can be connected here Using the foot controller you can control tones pitches volumes or the like by foot OUTPUT L MONO and R jack Page 10 Line level audio signals are output via these phone jacks For monophonic output use just the L MONDO jack 8 PHONES jack Page 10 Connect a pair of headphones here ODC IN terminal Page 9 For connecting an appropriate AC power adaptor PA 5C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha to supply power to the S30 40 STANDBY ON switch Page 14 Use this to switch the synthesizer on or off Even when the switch is in the STANDBY position electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level When not using the S30 for an extended period of time be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet This section explains how to connect to an AC power source audio and MIDI devices and a
126. aker Left Powered speaker Right Headphones INPUT INPUT OUTPUT L MONO OUTPUT R x oO 5 Fhe Soooseqs oA BE oOooooooo oOooooooo When using just one powered speaker connect it to the OUTPUT L MONDO jack on the rear panel Connecting to a Mixer If you want to integrate the S30 into a larger system with other instruments and additional audio processing capabilities connect it to a mixer amplifier and stereo monitor system as shown below OIO Headphones OUTPUT L PHONES MONO Connecting a pair of headphones does not affect audio output from the OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks You can monitor the same sounds via headphones and at the OUTPUT jacks 10 Connecting External MIDI Equipment You can connect an external MIDI device using a MIDI cable available separately and control it from this synthesizer You can also use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to control the synthesizer s internal sounds This section introduces several different applications of MIDI The HOST SELECT switch on the rear panel should be set to MIDI Otherwise MIDI information will not be transmitted from the synthesizer s MIDI OUT connector Controlling from an External MIDI Keyboard HOST SELECT 855 5 22232323Z oo bb MIDI IN External MIDI keyboard or synthe
127. ame as that set in the editor s MIDI channel Your edits made to a Board Voice will be retained in the Custom Bank until you turn off the instrument Note that the Custom Bank is a temporary memory so that edits in the Bank will be erased when you turn off the instrument Therefore it may be necessary to save Board Voice data using a computer S30 Plug in Board Plug in Memory Custom Bank PLG Bulk Dump Edit b Plug in i Voice Save Details about how to use the editor are given in the on line help Computer Editor When bulk dumping Board Voice data the edited Board Voices is received in the Custom Bank according to the Bank Select Message MSB LSB unique to each Plug in Board Therefore to play back these Board Voices you need to select the appropriate Banks in the synthesizer In Voice Play Mode select any Voice in a Plug in Memory PLG The Board Voice you have edited can now be played back if a Custom Bank has been selected at this screen For details about Custom Banks Bank Select Numbers MSB LSB and Board Voices refer to the Owner s Manual or the on line help that came with your Plug in Board Once you have transmitted the edited Board Voice data to the synthesizer and saved it to Memory Card as a plugin file type you can load the file without having to connect the computer If a Board Voice in the Custom Bank has been edited in Voice Edit Mode you can store it as a Plug
128. an directly select Menus associated to them page 65 Voice Mode spow DN Plug in Common General The General parameters are shown in the following two screens GEN Name General Name GEN Other General Other GEN Name General Name The parameters and settings are the same as for Normal Voices See Page 65 for further details GEN Other General Other There are parameters available for Plug in Board GEHGB ther Mode Assign Common Foly single E Mode Select monophonic or polyphonic playback Select whether the Voice is played back monophonically single notes only or polyphonically multiple simultaneous notes L Settings mono poly E Assign If you set Key Assign to single the doubled playback of the same note is prevented The synthesizer will terminate a note when the same note is received again If you select multi the synthesizer will consecutively assign each instance of the same received note to a separate channel making multiple part tone generation possible Li Settings single multi Plug in Common Quick Edit The parameters here are primarily for Plug in Voice volume and tone The following four screens are available OED Level Quick Edit Level OED EffectCtrl Quick Edit Effect OED Filter Quick Edit Filter OED EG Quick Edit Envelope Generator QED Level Quick Edit Level The parameters and settings are the same as for Normal Voices Details ar
129. and Job Modes for Voices and Performances To enter Edit or Job Mode simply press the EDIT or JOB key while in each respective Play Mode Similarly pressing the STORE key in Voice or Performance Mode takes you into Store Mode where you can store Voices or Performances Other Modes include Utility Mode where you can specify system settings Card Mode where you can perform tasks related to the Memory Card and Sequence Mode where you can play back MIDI song files or create a sequence chain Press the UTILITY key for Utility Mode the CARD key for Card Mode and the SEQ PLAY key for Sequence Mode MODE OVOICE PERFORM STORE OuTILITYy OcaRD OpFQ PLAY OEDIT O JOB PLA o o L COMPARE Play Modes Edit Modes 3 Performance Edit Mode When in each Play Mode you Page 106 ro 1 Voice Play Mode Page 59 can swiftly switch to each Press the EDIT key while in Press the VOICE key its LED respective Edit Mode by simply Performance Play Mode To exit will light to enter Voice Play pressing the EDIT key its to another Mode simply press Mode To exit to another Mode LED will light the respective for that Mode or simply press the respective key press the EXIT key to return to ror that Mode Voice Edit Mode Page 63 Performance Play Mode Press the EDIT key in Voice rite HEF Play Mode To exit to another Mode simply press the respective key for that Mode or GEH Hamet Chory a 2 8 7 Cursor Common WOE P
130. arameter CTLBSet1 5 Src Dest EL Su Berth C 1234 EHi i6d PCH Crs 34 14 Use Knob 1 and the DATA knob to specify the Element to be controlled Knob 1 moves the cursor blinking and the DATA knob displays the Element to be controlled c SHIFT PAGE A 738 PART ELEMENT tid Sree Dest EL Sw Berth CTLESe C 1234 KHM1 i6 PCH Crs i 4 14 2 DATA Use Knob 2 to set the Depth parameter The larger the setting the greater the depth of control SHIFT PAGE A 29 0O PART ELEMENT ti Sree Dest EL Sw Berth CTLESe C 1234 KH1ic ci6 PCH Crs 1234 34 SHIFT PAGE A 2 DATA oe PART ELEMENT Store the edited Voice Page 101 Now you have Internal Voice 001 A01 assigned PCH Crs Pitch Coarse to Knob 1 When you select and play this Voice in Voice Play Mode you can control the pitch of the Voice if you turn Knob 1 Details about the assignable control functions are given in the Control Set Destination Parameters in the separate Data List Controlling Parameters by Foot Controller By connecting an optional Foot Controller such as the FC7 to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack on the rear panel of the synthesizer you can control various parameters by foot without having to use your hands In the following example we introduce how to set up Foot Controller to work as Modulation Wheel MIDI HOST SELECT THRU OUT IN Mibi Mae TO HOST i
131. atically be selected L Settings Details about Wave Categories are given on Page 65 OSC Out Oscillator Out You can set the following output parameters for each Element of a Voice OSCAOQut Level Delay InsEF ELi 34 36 ins E Level Set the output level of each Element L Settings 0 127 E Delay Key On Delay Set the time delay between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the point at which the sound is played You can set different delay times for each Element Li Settings 0 127 Short Delay Key on Long Delay Key on E InsEF Insertion Effect Set the Insertion Effect to which the output signal from each Element is sent The Insertion Effect is bypassed if you select Thru Settings thru ins Insertion Effect 1 ins2 Insertion Effect 2 OSC Pan Oscillator Pan You can set the following Pan parameters for each Element in the Voice OSCEF arn Par Alter Fandom Scale EL1234 L 4 63 63 E Pan Set the stereo Pan position for each Element Wave This will also be used as the basic Pan position for the Alternate Random and Scale settings I Settings L63 Left C Center R63 Right E Alter Alternate Set the amount by which the sound is panned alternately left and right for each note you press The Pan setting is used as the basic Pan position Li Settings L64 0 R63 E Random Set the amount by which the sound is panned randomly left and right for each note
132. bs A B C 1 or 2 to move the cursor to the respective parameter without changing it s value You can also move the cursor using the DATA knob or the INC YES and DEC NO keys while holding down the SHIFT key You need to select the Voice before entering Voice Edit Mode Page 60 All parameters can be set and stored per Voice See page 16 on how to enter Voice Edit mode Common Edit and editing each Element Voices can consist of up to four Elements Page 32 Use Common Edit to edit the settings common to all four Elements Voice Edit Mode can be divided into screens for Common Edit and those for editing each Element In Voice Edit Mode Knob A is used to switch between the Common Edit screens and the screens for editing each Element Common Edit screens GEH ther Mode Assign MicroTuning Fols single 31 2 Indian Common Indicator Element 1 4 Edit Screens ASE hag Humber Chor EL1234 ABICPR Grand 1 J Elements 1 4 Indicator SHIFT PAGE DATA 589 86060 PART ELEMENT Voice Mode spow DN Wes i COMMON IN The amp Indicator If you alter any parameters in Voice Edit Mode the amp indicator will be displayed in the top left of the screen This gives a quick indication that the current voice has been modified but not yet stored Edit indicator GEWGHamne gt Chars E
133. cale Break Point 4 ___ 85 AMP Scale AMP Scale Offset _ 85 Element LFO Low Frequency Oscillator _ 85 LFO Wave _ _ _ 85 LFO Deph 86 Element EQ Equalizer _ 86 EQ Type _____HrvrTARYICT__ 86 EQ Param EQ Parameter ___ 86 Menu Display You will see the following if you use the PAGE knob while holding down the SHIFT key Use the PAGE knob to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to edit then release the SHIFT key to jump to the screen you were previously at Cursor GEMBOther gt Com Space C 1234 Elem 05C PCH FLT AMP LFO EG DATA O OOOO PART ELEMENT SHIFT PAGE Selecting a Menu On the S30 in Voice Edit Mode you can directly select a Menu using the PROGRAM PART keys 1 to 6 and 9 to 15 Each key has an associated Menu name shown below it m A L 9 10 ti 12 13 14 15 16 LFO EQ PLG osc PITCH FILTER AMPLITUDE You can set the Voice Name Voice output settings and other general parameters in the Common Edit screens The following two screens are available for general settings GEN Name General Name GEN Other General Other GEN Name General Name You can set a Voice Name consisting of up to 10 characters You can also select the Category Name to the left of the Voice Name 65 Categor
134. can be used to adjust the signal level around the specified frequency MH EQ Lowhids Gain Frey E Ioe 127dB 16HHz 17 4 M a EG Maida Gain Frey loe 12dB 16HHz 127 4 MH EQ HidhhMid Gain Frey loe 127dB 16HHz 17 48 132 E Gain Set the Gain This attenuates or boosts frequencies around the Frequency setting Li Settings 12dB 0dB 12dB E Freq Frequency Set the center frequency Frequencies around this point are attenuated boosted by the Gain setting Li Settings 100Hz 10kHz E O Frequency Characteristic This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics Li Settings 0 1 12 0 M EQ High Master EQ High This Equalizer covers high frequencies You can adjust the signal level at the specified frequency You can also select different Equalizer types Shapes H EQ High Share Wice Ga Frey Feak Hz iri B 127dB 6 5k iv A E Shape Select either a Shelving or Peaking equalizer The Peaking type attenuates boosts the signal at the specified Frequency setting whereas the Shelving type attenuates boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting T Settings shelv Shelving peak Peaking E Gain Set the Gain This attenuates or boosts frequencies around the Frequency setting Li Settings 12dB 0dB 12dB E Freq Frequency Set the center frequency Frequencies around this point are attenuated boosted b
135. ce without borrowing existing Reverb and Chorus settings stored with a Voice In the following illustration a mixer represents the logic behind how the different effects are applied to the sound in Performance Mode Each Part 1 to 16 is fed to the mixer through either Insertion Effect 1 or Insertion Effect 2 The signals for all Parts are summed in the mixer and then the System Effects Reverb and Chorus are applied to the mix as a whole Insertion System Effects Reverb Chorus N ffect u Effect Bypass You can temporarily switch effects off or on by pressing the EF BYPASS key To use this function you will need to specify the effect to be bypassed in the MSTR EF Bypass screen of Utility Mode Page 128 You can also specify more than one effect When you press the EF BYPASS key its LED will light and all Effects assigned to the currently selected Voice Performance will be bypassed EF MASTER bypass KEYBOARD E EXIT ENTER DEC NO INC YES The Effect Bypass will also apply to Effects on Plug in Boards other than the PLG100 series 51 as a Master Keyboard Performance Mode As previously explained your Synthesizer provides several convenient features that you can make use of in a live show or the like Here we introduce some examples to combine those features to meet your specific purpo
136. ce or Performance using a PROGRAM PART key etc on its front panel I Settings off disable on enable E Control Set the MIDI transmit receive parameters controlling the Sustain parameter of the QED EG _i Settings model mode2 model Messages are received as Parameter Change messages mode2 Messages are receives as Control Change messages MIDI Other Set other MIDI parameters MIGI Others ThruFort Sync Sey Ctrl Sys 1 int OFT E ThruPort You can connect your synthesizer to a computer via a dedicated serial cable on the TO HOST connector In which case MIDI messages received via the TO HOST connector can be passed through the MIDI OUT connector of the synthesizer Set the port number here LiSettings 1 8 E Sync To synchronize playback with an external MIDI device you can use either the synthesizer s internal clock int or MIDI clock signals from the external device midi Select int if you are using the synthesizer as the master or if you have no other MIDI devices connected to it Select MIDI when slaving your synthesizer to another MIDI Clock source connected to the MIDI IN connector T Settings MIDI int internal E SeqCtrl Sequencer Control Select whether or not to transmit receive Song Start Stop and Continue messages via MIDI This also switches the transmission of MIDI Clock messages on and off L Settings off on 131 MIDI GM XG Receive if a Multi Part Plug in Boa
137. change the playback tempo here To restore the Song s own playback tempo select LI Settings default tempo 25 300 When playing back a Song file using its own tempo data the tempo setting is shown in brackets These brackets disappear when you change the tempo E Meas Measure The Song measure in the current Chain Step is shown during playback If you stop playback you can use Knob 1 to enter a measure number and press the ENTER key to resume playback at that measure Li Settings 001 999 E Performance Bank Number Set the Performance Bank Program Number to be used in the Chain Step The Voices of each Part in the selected Performance will be used when playing back the Song file Use Knob 2 the MEMORY INT EXT keys BANK keys A to H and PROGRAM keys 1 to 16 to select the Memory Bank and Program Number of the Performance LI Settings not set INT EXT Bank 1 128 Program Number If no Performance changes are contained within a Song file is displayed as the Bank Number when the Song File is selected In this case the Song file will use the Program set in the currently selected Mode Voice Mode Performance Mode 126 Performances can be changed while Songs are playing or have been stopped However it does not change in real time during playback if you specify a Chain Step other than the current one In stead it changes when playback reaches the song at the s
138. ck Decayl Sustain ELi 34 Ler 128 izr E Hold Hold Level Set the Hold Level T Settings 128 0 127 4800 cents 0 4800 cents E Attack Attack Level Set the Attack Level Settings 128 0 127 4800 cents 0 4800 cents E Decay1 Decay 1 Level Set the Decay 1 Level T Settings 128 0 127 4800 cents 0 4800 cents E Sustain Sustain Level Set the Sustain Level T Settings 128 O 127 4800 cents 0 4800 cents PEG Release You can set Release Time and Release Level parameters for the Pitch Envelope Generator PEG Combined with the PEG Time and PEG Level settings these can be used control the change in sound from the moment a note is released You can set different values for each Element Time Lewe PEGERe leases EL1234 177 177 E Time Release Time Set the Release Time Li Settings 0 127 E Level Release Level Set the Release Level T Settings 128 0 127 4800 cents 0 4800 cents Se A Ga tian Sn There are five Time settings controlling the speed of changes to the sound and five Level settings controlling the pitch The pitch of a note is held at the Hold Level for the length of time defined by the Hold Time After the Hold Time has elapsed the pitch changes in accordance with the Attack Time Level Decay 1 2 Time and the Decay 1 Level then settles at the Sustain Level When the note is released the change in pitch is gov
139. ckly select Voices 20 BANK A to H keys Pages 60 104 Each key selects a Voice or Performance Bank Each Bank contains sixteen Voices or Performances In Voice Edit Mode each of the BANK A to D keys selects a Voice s Element ELEMENT SELECT while each of the BANK E to H keys turns the associated Voice s Element on or off ELEMENT ON OFF Page 46 When you activate Master Keyboard Mode by pressing the MASTER KEYBOARD key these key A to D can respectively select Zones 1 to 4 if the Master Keyboard Mode setting is 4 zone in Performance Edit Mode 21 PROGRAM PART 1 to 16 keys Pages 60 104 Each key selects a Voice or Performance from the current Bank In Voice Edit Mode each PROGRAM PART key selects an associated edit menu Page 65 In Performance Mode these keys select Parts 1 to 16 respectively O 2 O CARD slot Page 135 Insert a Memory Card here to transfer various data to from the instrument Read carefully the precautions on use of a Memory Card Page 135 before using a card 2 MIDI IN OUT and THRU connectors Page 11 MIDI IN receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device Use this connector to control the synthesizer from an external MIDI device MIDI OUT sends out MIDI messages generated by the synthesizer such as notes played on the keyboard or panel control knob variations to an external MIDI sound module or device MIDI THRU just reflects the MIDI mess
140. computer system Only switch the synthesizer on after you have made all the necessary connections It is recommended that you read this section before using the synthesizer Power Supply DC IN STANDBY O Rear panel To electrical output Make sure that the instrument s STANDBY ON switch is at the STANDBY off position connect the PA 5C s DC plug to the S30 s DC IN terminal on the instrument s rear panel Connect the adaptor s AC plug to the nearest electrical outlet Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA 5C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the S30 and may even pose a serious shock hazard ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET WHEN THE 830 IS NOT IN USE Connections fo External Audio Equipment Connectin Lonnecing TO EXTernad AUGIOC Equi Since the synthesizer has no built in speakers you need to monitor its sound output via external audio equipment Alternatively you could use a pair of headphones There are several methods of connecting to external audio equipment as described in the following illustrations Connecting Stereo Powered Speakers A pair of powered speakers can accurately produce the instrument s rich sounds with their own pan and effect settings Connect your powered speakers to the OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks on the rear panel Powered spe
141. crement the Voice Number WOE Plas PRELS128 Hi63 CPF GrandPianoad EG Low EG Mid EG Hi Cutoff RevTime SHIFT PAGE A DATA cre OCC OC PART ELEMENT EF MASTER OBypass KEYBOARD EXIT ENTER DEC NO INC YES Now you can play a selected Voice when you play the keyboard Details about selecting Voices using the DATA knob or the DEC NO and INC YES keys are given on Page 61 You can also select Voices using a combination of BANK E a tae Using Quick Access you can quickly select any of 12 types of Preset Voices and 4 types of Internal Voices at their factory default settings in each Bank according to their Categories The procedure is as follows Details about the Voices that can be selected using Quick Access are given in the separate Data List Press the QUICK ACCESS key in Voice Mode Its LED will light and Quick Access will be enabled WCE Quick 3 H1ICPFREGrandPianad E iLow G EQMi FLT Fra ChoSend Press the key again or switch to another Mode to disable Quick Access When you enable Quick Access the Voice you previously selected using Quick Access is selected again If you enable Quick Access while editing a Voice the Voice is not changed until you select another Voice via Quick Access You cannot use the MEMORY keys while Quick Access is enabled Use BANK keys A to H to select the Category There are eight Categories as listed below The Category names are printed below
142. ct Reverb Chorus Insertion 2 Band EQ 3E Interface Plug in Connector 15 pin digital I F connector t Dimensions W x D x H 138 5 x 89 0 x 8 5 mm 5 9 16 x 3 5 8 x 3 8 Weight 72g 2 502 bad Advanced DX TX Plug in Board PLG150 DX Add the classic sounds of Yamaha s world famous DX 7 synthesizer to the S80 S30 The PLG150 DX features the same 6 operator 16 note polyphonic FM tone generation system that took the synthesizer industry by storm This board is a must have for performing keyboard players and producers of contemporary music _ Tone Generator Type FM Synthesis a i gee Polyphony 16 notes a t ui i MAHA toe Voice 912 Preset Sees Kaan El 64 User 5 meim i Effect Part EQ Lowpass Highpass Interface Plug in Connector 15 pin digital I F connector Dimensions W x D x H 138 5 x 89 0 x 8 5 mm 5 9 16 x 3 5 8 x 3 8 Weight 63g 2 202 XG Plug in Board PLG100 XG This Plug in Board gives you over 400 professional quality sampled voices and 12 drum kits as well as 32 additional notes of polyphony Plus it fully supports XG MIDI specifications so you can use it to play back XG SMF MIDI song files from an external sequencer or the S80 S30 s internal Sequencer Home recording hobbyists in particular will find this Plug in Board an indispensable addition to the S80 S30 Tone Generator Type AWM2 Pee cre aa 2 Polyphony 32 notes YAMAHA we Voice Preset normal 480 drum kits 12 ro fpr io Effect
143. d Out For assignable parameters refer to System Controller Destination Parameters in the separate Data List rete dc to E ot rand E The following procedure explains how you can assign a desired parameter to Knob 1 or 2 You can assign controllers to each Voice or Part in a Performance Control Settings can be assigned as a Control Set and a each Controller can be used to control multiple parameters although this varies according to the type of Voice Here we introduce an example of how to set up Control Set 1 for Internal Voice 001 A01 by assigning PCH Crs Pitch Coarse to Knob 1 You can also assign separately a different MIDI Control Change Number to the same knob in Voice Mode and Performance Mode Details are given on Page 132 Press the VOICE key to enter Voice Play Mode MODE OVOICE PERFORM STORE J SEQ OUTILITY OCARD Odbray LCL JCI CI PLAY OEDIT O JOB STOP O U CI COMPARE Select Internal Voice 001 A01 and press the EDIT key to enter Voice Edit Mode Use the PAGE knob to switch to the CTL Set1 Control Set 1 screen CTL Seti Sree Dest EL Sw Depth C 1234 Miicails FLT Rez 34 14 SHIFT PAGE A DATA Ce 00000 PART ELEMENT Use Knob B to assign KN1 16 Knob 1 to the Sre Source parameter SHIFT PAGE A DATA re 0000 PART ELEMENT 42 Use Knob C to assign PCH Crs Pitch Coarse to the Dest Destination p
144. d Segment faster and negative values will play it back slower Li Settings Time 64 63 LiSettings Segment attack Affects the Hold Time Attack Time Decay 1 Time all Affects all FEG Time parameters FEG Time You can set various Time parameters for the Filter Envelope Generator FEG Combined with the FEG Level and FEG Release settings these can be used control the change in sound from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released You can set different values for each Element FEGETime Hold Attack Decayl Decay EL1i 34 12r iz 127 zr E Hold Hold Time Set the Hold Time Li Settings 0 127 E Attack Attack Time Set the Attack Time Li Settings 0 127 E Decay1 Decay 1 Time Set the Decay 1 Time Li Settings 0 127 E Decay2 Decay 2 Time Set the Decay 2 Time Li Settings 0 127 FEG Level You can set a Level parameter for the Filter Envelope Generator FEG Combined with the FEG Time and FEG Release settings these can be used control the change in sound from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released You can set different values for each Element FEGBLevels Hold Attack Decayl Sustain EL1234 177 175 177 E Hold Hold Level Set the Hold Level T Settings 128 0 127 9600 cents 9600 cents E Attack Attack Level Set the Attack Level I Settings 128 0 127 9600 cents 9600 cents E Decayl1 D
145. deiing Kanaalweg 18 G 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel 030 2828425 For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Address Kanaalweg 18 G 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel 030 2828425 Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever hem in als KCA Do not throw away the battery Instead hand it in as small chemical waste lithium disposal If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be deter mined by turning the unit OFF and ON please try to eliminate the prob lem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the inter ference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse cir cuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America
146. e Fine tune the pitch of each Drum Key Wave or Normal Voice Li Settings 64 63 E VelSens Velocity Sensitivity Set the velocity sensitivity of the pitch Positive settings will cause the pitch to rise the harder you play the keyboard and negative settings will cause it to fall Li Settings 64 0 63 This parameter is only available if the Type parameter in the OSC Wave screen is set to wave 9 Drum Key Filter You can apply filter settings to the Drum Voice A Low Pass Filter and High Pass Filter can be applied per Wave to change its tonal characteristics This parameter is only available if the Type parameter in the OSC Wave screen is set to wave FLT Cutoff Filter Cutoff FLTECutoff LPF WelSens Key C 3 259 63 Feso HFF ol E LPF Low Pass Filter Set the Cutoff frequency of the Low Pass Filter Only frequencies below this point are passed You can then use the Reso Resonance parameter to add further character to the sound Li Settings 0 255 Details about the Low Pass Filter are given on Page 78 E VelSens Velocity Sensitivity Set the velocity sensitivity of the Low Pass Filter Cutoff frequency Positive settings will cause the cutoff frequency to rise the harder you play the keyboard and negative settings will cause it to fall L Settings 64 0 63 E Reso Resonance Set the amount of Resonance harmonic emphasis applied to the signal at the Cutoff frequency Th
147. e Performance Plug in Sequence Chain and so on onto Memory Card The built in CARD slot can accept 3 3 volt Memory Cards SmartMedia Before using a Memory Card read through precautions on how to handle it Page 135 e Formatting a Memory Card You cannot use a new Memory Card to save files immediately The card must be formatted in Card Mode Page 140 beforehand e Saving and Loading Data You can save various kinds of data as files on a formatted Memory Card Each file on the card can be loaded when required You can save and load data such as System Voice Performance Plug in Sequence Chain or the like Since Sequence Chain data is held temporarily in the synthesizer s buffer memory and will be lost once you switch it off you need to save such data onto the Memory Card first Details about formatting a Memory Card saving and loading data and the recognized file types are given on Page 136 Basic Operations This section gives some basic explanations about operating the synthesizer There are several operation Modes Voice Play Mode Performance Play Mode etc each of which enables you to work efficiently with the synthesizer s various functions An overview of each Mode is given on Page 30 There are separate Play Modes for Voices and Performances To enter each of these Modes use the appropriate MODE key VOICE for Voice Play Mode PERFORM for Performance Play Mode There are also separate Edit
148. e complex arpeggio patterns ARPETsee Tyre Temeo Switch Hold Commonk Bi 3Beat z Dr az or oft SHIFT PAGE A o OOo PART ELEMENT DATA When the arpeggiator is switched on the notes you play and hold down on the keyboard will be arpeggiated using the currently selected Voice or Performance and according to the Arpeggio Type Tempo and Note Limit settings In Voice Mode the currently selected Voice will be arpeggiated In Performance Mode the Voices of Parts for which both the Layer and arpeg giator are switched on are arpeggiated Page 117 Only notes within the Note Limit range will be arpeggiated Therefore if the notes you play are not arpeggiated they may be outside this range Details about the Note Limit settings are given later The Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels can be used while the arpeggiator is running Now try selecting other Arpeggio Types and arepggiating different Voices You can use a Foot Switch optional to switch the Arpeggiator on off Details about assigning parameters to the Foot Switch are given on Pages 43 129 Setting the Tempo You can use Knob C to adjust the tempo between 25 and 300 BPM This parameter setting is used by the Arpeggiator Use Knob C to jump to the Tempo parameter Now use Knob C the DATA knob or the INC YES and DEC NO keys to set the tempo You can also set the tempo using the TEMPO knob on the front panel RPETsFe Tyre Teneo Sw
149. e 127 A EMi a NEY i i i EE A PESE EEPE PEIE EEN EE EEEN EE E AEA ENA AT 104 MOT T OPE a an 000 orir ERE 28 MW Contiol Depli essescsnsrsrserrre inn EE 95 119 DY Mocua on Dop a oa 119 N T a E EE EEN 64 O Octave and MIDI Transmit Channel Settings seissiirirsintisiiseiiisi 60 103 OSC Assign Oscillator ASO ccscciieusisesvdindnecseniamtaneerunes 97 OSG Loni A acct sucssecccaicizcnictiarasetxkarsasencaasiconatd ERNE ER 75 OSC Other Oscillator yer saiispessciviassteiassaeaecancereeeeaosnenaseaians 90 OC Out Oxlar On ern vies ii E NN 70 90 Bs OME MCB esl orem Pai esnai 75 90 OSC Velocity Oscillator Velocity scisicsicousiviriendienwienaanes 97 OCT aame Oa alor T ae anA 74 89 OUTPUT Lf MOND G0 E NE Renna 8 P ME E E AIENEA OOA A ORNE IA AA AAIEN O 6 18 Part Setinde for gach Part scxchssvesecccvartveniensicasiasesiorcarinneiamwoiraraanen 114 P ek a AER 119 Part Layo Toen eae en ees 117 PD T a R 114 T a a E 118 hi T a K T NA AEN NA EAE I ANE AAT E E TE ITE O E 115 PCH TEG Pich Envelope Gere uorennsnsenriariiiern 98 PCH Scale Pitch Scale jenise resnie u nr EIN ASE EEEN R 7T POF Tune Pitch Tung auseire AEEA 75 91 E REEE 76 A e EE IA EES EENIA I A E E A T A PAET 76 AoA I PEIA A AREE EE T ERAN E E E E A EA 76 PEG VelSens PEG Velocity Sensitivity c ccccccccscssecsscesssssesssceseeseeens 76 Pe e C T aT 103 Perlormance Edil seorrieare an ae 16 106 agonal cer 151 2 Lt ead a1 MOE aieea AE aan 17 123 Performance Memo
150. e Layer Part T Settings L63 Left C Center R63 Right E RevSend Reverb Send Set the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect 1 2 or the by passed signal to the Reverb effect Li Settings 0 127 E ChoSend Chorus Send Set the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect 1 2 or the by passed signal to the Chorus effect Li Settings 0 127 QED EF Quick Edit Effect You can set the amount of Chorus applied to the Layer Part as well as Portamento settings GEDGEF 3 Chorus Portamento Time Commor 63 oft izr E Chorus Set the Return level of the Chorus effect as an offset value L Settings 64 0 63 E Portamento Switch Portamento on or off L Settings off on E Time Set the pitch transition time Higher values mean longer transition times L Settings 64 0 63 109 Performance Mode spow SIUDWIOJ 9 QED Filter Quick Edit Filter These parameters control filters which govern the tonal quality of the Voice If you are using LPF Low Pass Filter and HPF High Pass Filter combined together the parameters in the QED Filter screen only affects LPF GEDGEF1ilters Cutoff Feso Common 63 63 E Cutoff Raise or lower the Cutoff frequency for each Voice of a Layer Part L Settings 64 0 63 E Reso Resonance Set the amount of Resonance harmonic emphasis applied to the signal at the Cutoff frequency Li Settings 64 0 63 QED EG Quick
151. e Mode E Play Mode Performance Edit Mode Performance Job Mode PLAY QEDIT STOP C L COMPARE Performance Play Mode This Mode is used when playing Performances You can layer multiple Voices Parts to create rich sonic textures You can also create multitimbral setups by assigning Parts to different MIDI channels You can layer Plug in Part as well as AWM2 based Voices Performance Edit Mode In this Mode you can edit and create Performances You can save up to 128 Performances to internal memory or up to 64 to external memory Memory Card Performance Job Mode In this Mode you can copy and initialize Performances and perform other such operations Jobs on them 30 Sequence Play Mode In this Mode you can use the sequencer to play back Song files Standard MIDI Files held on Memory Card The Songs can be played back individually or as a chain By switching Performance you can also change the sounds associated with each track in a Song Select this Mode when setting parameters that apply to the synthesizer system as a whole These include MIDI settings and synthesizer setup parameters Utility Job Mode In this Mode you can restore the synthesizer s factory settings Insert a Memory Card into the CARD slot and you can save files to it load files from it and do various other things with the data on the card Voices A Voice is a sound created from the many parameters set in
152. e Multi Part Edit process in Performance Play Mode are explained here If a multitimbral Plug in board is installed up to 32 Parts can be combined in a single Performance However the settings for the Plug in Parts cannot be stored in memory WB An overview of Performances is given on Page 34 Performance Play Mode Display You will see the following screen when you enter Performance Play Mode There are seven Performance Play Mode screens as explained below Use the PAGE knob to switch between screens Details about how to enter Performance Play Mode are given on Page 16 PFM Playa INT 128 HieaCPfi Init Perf J Eth Low i Et Hi 1 Ist screen PFM Play Performance Play Main Performance screen SHIFT PAGE A gt OQO PART ELEMENT DATA 2nd screen PFM Srch Performance Search You can quickly search for a Performance by specifying the Performance Memory and Category 102 In the 3rd to 7th screens you can set the output levels stereo pan position and other general parameters for each Part Multi Part Edit These are useful when using the synthesizer with a sequencer Details are given on Page 104 PFM Mit Volume Performance Multi Volume PFM Mlit Pan Performance Multi Pan PFM Mlit RevSend Performance Multi Reverb Send PFM Mit ChoSend Performance Multi Chorus Send PFM Mlit NoteSft Performance Multi Note Shift 3rd screen 4th screen 5th screen 6th screen 7th screen
153. e Number to 89 to assign Arpeggio Hold to Knob 1 HIDI Are Switch Hold Out UcetChtUced Sys 38 59 aff 16 SHIFT PAGE A DATA oO 00000 PART ELEMENT Press the PERFORM key to enter Performance Mode Select Internal Performance 075 E11 then enter Performance Edit Mode by pressing the EDIT key Turn Knob A until Common is displayed at the bottom left of the screen Use the PAGE knob to switch to the CTL Assign1 screen Turn Knobs 1 2 to set their parameters to the same values as the Control Change Numbers set in Step That is assign a value of 89 to Knob 1 and a value of 90 to Knob 2 CTLBASsigni gt EC Enob i Enob Common CFootCtrl A 29 E5 SHIFT PAGE A DATA oe 00000 Sd PART ELEMENT Store the edited Performance Page 124 Now for Internal Performance 075 E11 Arpeggio Hold is assigned to Knob 1 and Arpeggio ON OFF to Knob 2 If you select this Performance in Performance Play Mode turning each knob left or right will switch its respective parameter off or on respectively The Arpeggiator responds to notes below C3 on the keyboard If you do not wish to control the Destination parameter of the Voice enter Performance Edit Mode switch to the RCV Sw2 screen of Performance Part Edit then set the parameters for Knobs 1 and 2 to off In Performance Mode to use the Arpeg giator for Parts which have their Layer parameter Layer Switch
154. e Performances from one location to another Itis used for copying parameter settings from an existing Performance to the current Performance you are editing FFH Cory Job CFE GrandFianad Current Q 2 3 4 Source Performance Memory Select the Performance Memory containing the Performance source from which you will copy parameter settings T Settings INT Internal EXT External Performance Mode spow SIUDWIOJ 9 2 Source Performance Number Select the Performance Number of the source Performance The Performance Name is shown in the top line of the display LI Settings 001 128 INT 001 064 EXT When copying you can set the current Performance number destination for the source Performance number In this case if you have edited several settings of the current Performance you will copy those recent settings not stored ones before editing Therefore you can edit a Part and copy all edits to another Part 3 Source Performance Part Select the Part of the source Performance Settings Part01 to Part16 PartPL Plug in Part 4 Destination Part Set the Part of the destination Performance I Settings Part0O1 to Part16 Arp Arpeggio Effect PartPL Plug in Part If you choose Arp Arpeggio or Effect the Arpeggio and Effect settings for the Voice assigned to the source Part will be copied You can send all the parameter settings for the current Performance to your computer or some
155. e given on Page 66 QED EffectCirl Quick Edit Effect The parameters and settings are the same as for Normal Voices Details are given on Page 66 QED Filter Quick Edit Filter The parameters and settings are the same as for Normal Voices Details are given on Page 67 94 QED EG Quick Edit Envelope Generator The EG Envelope Generator can be used to control the change in Plug in Voice volume over time There are three parameters for this EG controlling the change in volume from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released or to the point where it has faded to zero GEDGEG gt Attack Decay Release Common 63 63 63 Level 7 Time Attack Decay Release Time Time Time Kor on Key off E Attack Set the Attack Time the time taken for the volume to reach its peak after a note is pressed on the keyboard L Settings 64 0 63 E Decay Set the Decay Time the time taken for the volume to change from its peak to a steady level L Settings 64 0 63 E Release Set the Release Time the time taken for the volume to fade to zero after the note is released L Settings 64 0 63 Plug in Common Arpeggio In the following four screens you can set parameters for the Arpeggiator used by the Plug in Voice The parameters are the same as for Normal Voices Details are given on Page 67 ARP Type Arpeggio Type ARP Limit Arpeggio Note Limit ARP Mode Ar
156. e in the MIX Vce page set 2 for RcvCh in the LYR Mode page Now you are ready for solo performance within the upper range You can play in a Voice assigned to Part 2 based on MIDI Receive channel 2 If you set on to Layer in the LYR Mode page the RcvCh setting will be ignored For unwanted Parts in Split play set their MIDI Receive channels RevCh to other than those used for the lower and upper Parts In the example above the RcvCh values for Part 3 to 16 must be set to any other than 1 and 2 In Performance Edit Mode you can make detailed settings for every Part In case that a Part does not sound make sure the volume setting for that Part For more information refer to page 115 Before exiting Performance Edit Mode store above settings in a Performance For storing a Performance refer to page 124 In Performance Play Mode recall the Performance you have just stored Simply pressing the MASTER KEYBOARD key activates or deactivates the Split configuration you made above 4 Zones The illustration below shows an example of a 4 Zone configuration A zone refers to a specific key range on the keyboard You can logically divide a keyboard into up to four key ranges with separate MIDI channels and other associated settings so that you can control multiple Parts at the same time A Split setting can divides the entire keyboard into two absolute sections key ranges In a 4 zone setting
157. ecay 1 Level Set the Decay 1 Level T Settings 128 0 127 9600 cents 9600 cents W Sustain Sustain Level Set the Sustain Level I Settings 128 0 127 9600 cents 9600 cents 8 FEG Release You can set Release Time and Release Level parameters for the Filter Envelope Generator FEG Combined with the FEG Time and FEG Level settings these can be used control the change in sound from the moment a note is released FEGERelease Time Lengel ELi 34 1277 177 Voice Mode E Time Release Time Set the Release Time Li Settings 0 127 E Level Release Level Set the Release Level T Settings 128 0 127 9600 cents 0 9600 cents Filter Envelope Generator Settings There are five Time settings controlling the speed of changes to the sound and five Level settings controlling the amount of filtering applied The tone of a note is held at the Hold Level for the length of time defined by the Hold Time After the Hold Time has elapsed the tone changes in accordance with the Attack Time Level Decay 1 2 Time and the Decay 1 Level then settles at the Sustain Level When the note is released the change in tone is governed by the Release Time Level settings Velocity Sensitivity and other parameters can also be set if required Level Attack Decay Sustain Release Level Level Level Key off Level Hold Level Time Hold Attack Decay Decay Release Time Time Time Ti
158. ed if you press the DEC NO key during execution The synthesizer can automatically load files when you switch it on You will need to insert the card into the CARD slot before switching the synthesizer on Details are given in the section Automatically Loading Files Page 136 If there is already data in the synthesizer it will be completely lost when you load a file A A NOTE Take care not to erase important data when performing operations When loading a file the Memory full message will be displayed if the space left in your synthesizer s internal memory is insufficient Free up space by deleting unwanted data and so on then try loading the file again When loading a file the File not found message will be displayed if the File Type you have selected does not exist on the Memory Card You can rename files using up to eight alphabetic and numeric characters ee as Tufe Cursor a airmen TLE 5 Bet CHEWFILE S2H File Type File Number File Name 139 E Type File Type LI Settings all all data all voice chain Sequence Chain plugin other Details about File Types are given on Page 136 Use Knob B to select the File Type and Knob C to select the File Number If you press the SHIFT key the directory for the currently selected file is displayed Further details are given in the section Card Mode Operations Page 137 To rename the file use Knob 2 to move
159. eessesseseeees 92 AMP KeyFlw AMP Key Follow cccccccsssssscsssesscsssesssesssssscssseesssons 84 AMP Scale AMP Scaling Break Pont isscicsescccstecavscaectnsaspanvosasrigaaarsseen 85 AMP Scale AMP Scaling Offset c ccccccccccsscsssssssssssssssessesssesssesseesens 85 AMP VelSens Amplitude Velocity Sensitivity ccccccccscsscssecsseeneees 92 Pee OO seta ian ni eneudiaadend 26 em Car Oe ee NORTE 32 ARP Limit Arpeggio Note Limit esseeseeseeseeseesiesesreerisresrerresriesrerresress 68 ARP Mode Arpeggio Mode cccccccssscsssesscssscsssessesssesssessesseesscessssssons 68 ARP PlavEF Arpegsio Play Filleth sco msariveenensen armenian 68 ARP Tre Oroa ie T sen 67 a T a 36 Assrenine Parameters to Kuobs 1l and 12 rnssrscniensnnnieanicnn 42 Assigning Parameters to Knobs A B and C nenne 41 US aED AEA E E E A AE A A E Bo 120 AL Tt Dop eeii 96 120 Perna Loading Fleisce iiaa 136 B BANK A to H RES cet scoscesds coretiniyprmaccunntnndeoteuncneensaoiitadanenaniaideeanenteolaeandebsaies 7 Danki Fr II a 59 102 C Cra MOO oree E A a E 17 30 135 C E A E ARAR eee 8 Car Play haC k eriirr serea EEE ESEESE 126 Choris U a a E EE 50 74 113 Common Settings for all Parts sissivircecosesoosavseonsassoriverieueaeseoens 107 OPT ATO O epi ad ais 67 110 Common Controler sesers a a tiie 69 110 Common Edit and editing each Elements uriarseneiiinae 45 63 Ot E O eoa E a a ON Toes Common EO Egualizer ccccccctsvencgn
160. el Quick Edit Level OED EffectCtrl Quick Edit Effect OED Filter Quick Edit Filter OED EG Quick Edit Envelope Generator QED Level Quick Edit Level Most parameters and settings have already been explained for Normal Voices Details are given on Page 66 QED EffecitCtrl Quick Edit Effect Most parameters and settings have already been explained for Normal Voices Details are given on Page 66 QED Filter Quick Edit Filter Most parameters and settings have already been explained for Normal Voices Details are given on Page 67 QED EG Quick Edit Envelope Generator The EG Envelope Generator can be used to set the transition in the Drum Voice output level over time The EG has two parameters determining how the output level of the sound changes from the point at which a note is pressed to the point at which the sound has completely faded out GEDEEG gt Commor Decay Attack 63 63 aec pe o Attack Decay E Attack Set the Attack time the time from the moment the note is pressed to the point at which the maximum sound output level is reached Li Settings 64 0 63 E Decay Set the Decay time the time from the point of maximum sound output level to the point at which it has completely faded out Ll Settings 64 0 63 Drum Common Arpeggio The following four screens are available for Drum Voice arpeggio parameters The parameters and settings are the same as for Normal
161. en executing a Job or Store operation as described in other sections of this manual EF MASTER OpypassOKEYBOARD EXIT ENTER DEC NO_ INC YES es of Parameters Absolute and Relative There are many ways to set parameters Some parameters require you to directly enter numerical settings or alphabetic characters With others you can choose from a number of available settings Furthermore some types of parameters are absolute whereas others are relative For example the absolute parameter in the following illustration can be set to either Mono or Poly For other absolute parameters such as Volume the setting can be any value between zero and 127 The Volume setting has a linear on to one relationship with the actual volume as shown in the graph on the left However relative parameters do not follow the same relationship The graph on the bottom shows the role of the Velocity Offset parameter The value you have set here known as an offset is added to or subtracted from the actual value With Velocity Offset the specified offset value is added to or subtracted from the actual velocity of the notes you play on the keyboard Sometimes these types of relative parameters are set as a percentage GEH Other Mode Assign MicroTuning C 1234 Foly single Si Indian mono poly QEDEL C 123 uel Uol Pan FRevSend ChoSend Leg C 127 127 E 4 0 127 1 Volume absolute Volume
162. ent a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released You can set different values for each Element mej Attack Decayl Decay HEGET i EL1i234 ag iff 12r 83 E Attack Attack Time Set the Attack Time Li Settings 0 127 E Decayl Decay 1 Time Set the Decay 1 Time Li Settings 0 127 E Decay2 Decay 2 Time Set the Decay 2 Time Li Settings 0 127 AEG Level You can set various Level parameters for the Amplitude Envelope Generator AEG Combined with the AEG Time and AEG Release settings these can be used control the change in output level from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released You can set different values for each Element AEGBLevels Init Attack ELi Decay Sustain 234 177 4 C123 ivf E Init Initial Level Set the Initial Level The Level when a key is pressed Li Settings 0 127 E Attack Attack Level This shows the Attack Level Fixed at 127 E Decayl1 Decay 1 Level Set the Decay 1 Level Li Settings 0 127 E Sustain Sustain Level Set the Sustain Level Li Settings 0 127 AEG Release You can set Release Time and Release Level parameters for the Amplitude Envelope Generator AEG Combined with the AEG Time and AEG Level settings these can be used control the change in output level from the moment a note is released You can set different values for each Element Time Lewe HEGERe leases EL1234 177 Cao E
163. er Knobs state position is maintained hold or reset when you switch between Voices I Settings hold reset If you select reset the controllers will be reset to the following states positions Pitch Bend suiccsiiiesissris Center Modulation Wheel Minimum Aftertouch ccccceeeeeee Minimum Foot Controller Maximum Foot SW iC liccdciaveravecnxdans Off E BCCurve TG Breath Curve Set the Breath Curve that defines how the sound is output according to Breath Controller MIDI information LI Settings thru soft hard wide Adjusted Breath Control thru Zo Received Breath Control Adjusted Breath Control soft toa Woy eek Received Breath Control Adjusted Breath Control hard u aa Received Breath Control Adjusted Breath Control wide Received Breath Control In Voice Mode you can set parameters for Controllers The following four screens are available CTRL KnobA Control Knob A CTRL KnobB Control Knob B CTRL KnobC Control Knob C CTRL Other Control Other CTRL Knobs A to C You can assign various control functions to Assignable Knobs A to C on the front panel CTRL EKnobA gt CCH Dest Sys 6 C EQLow G 129 E CC Control Number Assign MIDI Control Change Numbers to Assignable Knobs A to C Settings 000 095 see the separate Data List for details E Dest Control Destination Set the function to be controlled by Assignable Knobs
164. er Point GEMM Kbd Mode Lower j chaz C 3 Commor sF1it cheH1 Turning the PAGE knob while holding down the SHIFT key enables you to scroll though parameters in the Menu screens Page 106 OSelect layer for the Mode parameter using the Knob B If Master Keyboard Mode is deactivated without the MASTER KEYBOARD key pressed the Mode parameter value will be shown in brackets like layer Use Knobs C and 1 to respectively set MIDI transmit channels for the Lower and Upper parameters Note that Lower and Upper refer to two Parts Zones to be layered together These channel settings can create and send performance information on two separate channels to the internal tone generator and an external MIDI device via the MIDI OUT connector Here we set Ch01 for Lower and Ch02 for Upper You can also use the PROGRAM PART keys 1 to 16 to select MIDI channels for the Lower and Upper Parts Page 108 Turn the Knob A and select a Part First select PartO1 for the Upper Part Use the PAGE knob and open the Mix Voice MIX Vce screen Select a Voice for the Upper Part CLO Search MIeBWUce Memory H E T BI CPF GrandFiano umbe Farti PRE1 128 H1 Use the PAGE knob to open the Layer Mode LYR Mode screen Set the Layer Switch Layer to off and the MIDI Receiving Channel RcevCh to 1 LYFEMode gt s Mode Are Layer Row lh Parte Fols or o
165. erned by the Release Time Level settings Velocity Sensitivity and other parameters can also be set if required Release Level Attack Decayi Sustain Level Level Level Key off Pitch Hold Level Hold Attack Decay Decay2 Time Time Time Time Release Time PCH Scale Pitch Scale You can set the Pitch Scaling for each Element Pitch Scaling is used to vary the Element pitch PEG Levels and PEG Times according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard PFCHOKE eF lwaPitch Center 1H C 3 EGT ime Center EL1234 3 r E Pitch Adjust the sensitivity of the Pitch Scaling for each Element according to the position of the note on the keyboard The Center parameter is used as the basic pitch for this parameter A positive setting will cause the pitch of lower notes to change less and that of higher notes to change more Negative values will have the opposite effect T Settings 200 0 200 At 100 neighboring notes are pitched one semitone 100 cents apart 17 E Center Center Key Set the basic pitch used by the Pitch parameter Li Settings C 2 G8 You can also set this parameter by pressing the respective note on the keyboard while holding down the SHIFT key Speed of pitch change Lower range Center Basic Pitch Higher range E EGTime The EGTime parameter controls the PEG Times for each Element according to the positions of the notes on the
166. estination Voice If the source is a Normal or Drum Voice you can only choose a destination if the Element Drum Key has been set L Settings normal Voice EL1 EL4 Drum Voice CO C6 If you choose to copy Common parameters from the source this screen will change to Common VCE Bulk Dump You can send all the parameter settings for the current Voice to your computer or some other external MIDI device using Bulk Dump WOE Bulk Dumes Job Current Woice You must set the correct MIDI Device Number in order to perform a Bulk Dump Details are given on Page 130 101 Voice Store You can store save the parameter settings for up to 128 Voices to each of your synthesizer s Memories INT Internal or to its Memory Card EXT External The procedure is as follows Up to 64 plug in vioces can be stored in Banks A to D of PLG When you perform this the settings for the destination Voice will be overwritten Important data should always be backed up to computer a separate Memory Card or some other storage device Press the STORE key after editing a Voice You will see the Voice Store screen WCE CPfiGrandPiana CPF EInit Voice tore Eat 128 H16 Use Knob 1 to select the destination Voice Memory INT or EXT This is fixed to PLG when storing a Plug in Voice Use Knob 2 to select the destination Voice Number This will set the Voice Memory Number to which your Voice will be stored You ca
167. ey you can move the cursor without a parameter value being changed Page 19 44 6 PAGE knob Page 18 Switches between screens in each Mode Each Mode includes several screens LCD Liquid Crystal Display This is a backlit 2 line display 8 Knobs A B C 1 and 2 Page 19 In each Play Mode these knobs mainly control the functions respectively assigned to them In each Edit Mode each knob is used to enter a value for the associated parameter shown in the display Depending on the operation or the screen you are working in these knobs will function differently Knobs A to C can be assigned to system control functions Pages 41 129 Knobs 1 and 2 can be assigned control functions that affect Voices Pages 42 69 9 DATA knob Page 20 Use this to increase or decrease the value of the parameter at which the cursor is positioned 0 EF BYPASS key Page 51 Enables dsiables the Effect Bypass Press the key its LED will light to bypass the effects used with the current Voice or Performance The bypassed effects Reverb Chorus or Insertion are specified in Utility Mode Page 128 41 MASTER KEYBOARD key pages 52 106 The S30 keyboard can work as MIDI master keyboard in Performance mode When the key is pressed and switched on the LED will light the keyboard can play and control multiple MIDI sound modules connected to the S30 2 EXIT key Page 18 The menus and screens of
168. f the filters used by the Elements Also set the FEG parameters as necessary At the AMP Amplitude and AEG Amplitude Envelope Generator screens set the volume and other output level related parameters used by the Elements Also set the AEG parameters as necessary At the LFO Low Frequency Oscillator screens set the modulation related parameters used by the Elements At the EO Equalizer screens adjust the equalizer parameters affecting the tonal characteristics of the Elements Store the edited Voice 45 Selecting a Voice to Edit Enter Voice Play Mode by pressing a VOICE key VOICE PERFORM STORE OutTILity OcaRD OER PLAY OEDT O JOB STOP COMPARE Select the Voice Number of the Voice you wish to edit Page 60 Before editing first enter Voice Job Mode and copy the Voice you wish to edit to internal user memory If you are creating a Voice from scratch use the Initialize function to initialize a Voice in internal user memory Details are given on Page 100 Entering Voice Edit Mode Voice creation editing is carried out in Voice Edit Mode To enter Voice Edit Mode press the EDIT key while in Voice Play Mode MODE VOICE OPERFORM STORE Outiity OcaRD Ofte PLAY eEDIT O JOB STOP COMPARE Common Edit and Element Edit Each Voice consists of up to four Elements Page 32 The parameters common to all four Elements are known as Common Edit parameters Voice Edit
169. f the Plug in Board This number must match the Device Number of the external MIDI device when transmitting receiving bulk data parameter changes or other system exclusive messages to from it Li Settings 1 16 all off PLG System Plug in System Set the system parameters for each Plug in Board Use Knob C 2 to change the parameter The number of screens and parameters will vary depending on the type of Plug in Board installed In the following example a PLG150 AN Plug in Board has been installed in the Plug in slot FLG Systems Wel Curve fren ChelHo Morr oft Part Assign assignment for a Single Part Plug in Board is fixed as follows e Voice Mode 1 e Performance Mode 15 Utility Mode apoyw 4N Synchronize the tempo settings of the S30 and the Plug in Board If you are using a Plug in Board capable of generating arpeggio patterns you can synchronize its tempo with that of the S30 Enter Utility Mode and select the PLG MIDI screen Then use the appropriate knob to set the Clock parameter to on Enter Voice Mode select the Plug in Voice of the respective Plug in Memory then enter Voice Edit Mode Use knob A to select Elem as shown at the bottom left of the screen Use the PAGE knob to select the name of the Plug in Board as shown at the bottom left of the screen Then enter the Plug in native part parameter screen Use the PAGE knob to select the Plug in na
170. ff 1 If other Parts MIDI receive channels RevCh are set to the same ones assigned to two Parts those Parts will also sound when you play on the keyboard This might be troublesome if you simply need two layered Parts To mute unnecessary Parts while you play on the keyboard set RcvCh for those Parts to off You can only play Voices from layered Parts As in the same manner in steps to set up for the Upper Part Select PartPL for the Lower Part go to the Mix Voice MIX Vce page using the PAGE knob and select another Voice Plug in Voice for the Lower Part Also go to the Layer Mode LYR Mode page to set the Layer Switch Layer to off and the MIDI Receiving Channel RcvCh to a You can set additional Part settings in Performance Edit Mode If you have a trouble possibly associated with these settings such as no sound from a specific Part confirm any Part settings related to volume etc Refer to page 115 for more information about Part settings Before exiting Performance Edit Mode store above settings in a Performance For storing a Performance refer to page 124 In Performance Play Mode recall the Performance you have just saved Simply pressing the MASTER KEYBOARD key activates or deactivates the Layer configuration you made above Besides the Layer Zone configuration in Master Keyboard Modes you can use the Layer Switch Layer for each Part to make a Layer configuration
171. for S80 S30 amp CS6x CS6R May not be included in your area Please check with your Yamaha dealer The Included CD ROM Application software for your synthesizer included on this CD ROM The Voice Editor application lets you edit your synthesizer s sounds through a graphical user interface The Card Filer application lets you exchange data between your synthesizer and computer Details are given in the separate Installation Guide or the on line manuals included with the software A Never attempt to play back the track1 in which the application software is located on an audio CD player Doing so may result in damage to your hearing as well as to your CD player audio speakers Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and or digital audio files is strictry prohibited except for your personal use The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument The company names and product names in this Owner s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Table of Contents The Controls amp Connectors csccccsscsccsccsceees 6 Be OT UBS sesiscsrassescceneseperieniretaeetoreaere eens 9 Power Supply access casesndyceesivonsadendyartundetntendenansnevamcneven 9 CG HOUS E 9 Tora De Uei 14 Pasie OMCIANOUS cnecirisden a 16 areto a Moda sinn 16 POLE CLING A TOTOO ac
172. g in Part However the System Effects Reverb and Chorus are not applied to Parts but to the Performance as a whole Voice Mode Performance Mode Voice1 16 Insertion Effects System Effects System Effects Output Chorus Output Plug in Board m Details about Effects are given on Page 50 29 About the Modes The S30 has various Modes which you can select according to the task you wish to perform OUTILITY OcARD OpFQ Utility Mode L Utility Job Mode ma M Card Mode Voice Play Mode Normal Voices and Drum Voices can be played in this Mode You can select from Preset Voices 256 Normal Voices plus 8 Drum Kits Internal User Voices 128 Normal Voices plus 2 Drum Kits and External Memory Card Voices 128 Normal Voices plus 2 Drum Kits That is a choice of 512 Normal Voices and 12 Drum Kits The choice is extended further still if you have an optional Plug in Board installed The MIDI settings for Voices are set in Utility Mode Voice Edit Mode Normal Voices and Drum Voices can be created and edited in this Mode You can save up to 128 edited Normal Voices and 2 edited Drum Kits as User Voices in internal memory You can also store them to Memory Card as external memory Voice Job Mode In this Mode you can copy and initialize Voices and perform other such operations Jobs on them Voice Mode Voice Play Mode Voice Edit Mode Voice Job Mode Performanc
173. g of zero will produce no filter changes at all With a negative setting the EG envelope will be inverted Ll Settings 64 0 63 E VelCutoff Velocity Cutoff Set the sensitivity of the Cutoff frequency to note velocity A positive setting will raise the Cutoff frequency for notes played harder and lower it for notes played more softly A negative setting will have the opposite effect Li Settings 64 0 63 E VelReso Velocity Resonance Set the sensitivity of the selected Resonance parameter to note velocity A positive setting will produce large Resonance changes for notes played harder and smaller changes for notes played more softly A negative setting will have the opposite effect Ll Settings 64 0 63 FEG VelSens FEG Velocity Sensitivity You can set parameters controlling the sensitivity of the Filter Envelope Generator FEG to note velocity FEGEWe 1 Sens i Lengel Timne Se3ment EL1234 63 63 attack E Level Set the sensitivity of the FEG s Level its effectiveness to note velocity A positive setting will cause larger tonal changes for notes played harder and smaller changes for notes played more softly A negative setting will have the opposite effect _i Settings 64 0 63 E Time Segment Set the velocity sensitivity of the FEG s Time parameters Use Knob 2 to select the Segment then use Knob 1 to set its Time parameter Positive Time settings will play back the specifie
174. h Gain Set the amount by which the frequencies above the High Frequency setting are attenuated or boosted Ll Settings 32 0 32 e P EO Parametric EQ The Parametric EQ is used to attenuate or boost signal levels around the Frequency setting by the amount specified in the Gain setting 32 different Frequency Characteristics are available The following parameters are available for this type of Equalizer EQVIGFParam Frey Gain E EL1 3 295 32 Sl EO Param EQ Parameter LN lt p E Freq Frequency Set the center frequency Frequencies around this point are attenuated boosted by the Gain setting LI Settings 139 7Hz 12 9kHz E Gain Set the Gain This attenuates or boosts frequencies around the Frequency setting Ll Settings 32 0 32 E Q Frequency Characteristic Set the O Frequency Characteristic 32 different Characteristics are available T Settings 0 31 e Boost6 Boost 6dB Boost12 Boost 12dB Boost18 Boost 18dB These can be used to boost the level of the entire signal by 6dB 12dB and 18dB respectively The EQ Parameters will be unavailable e thru If you select this the equalizers are bypassed and the entire signal is unaffected Drum Voices With Drum Voices different drum and percussion Waves or Normal Voices are assigned to notes across the keyboard from CO to C6 forming an entire drum kit For editing Drum Voices there are five Common Edit screens affecting all the D
175. h to use some parameter settings from another Voice This function is not used for copying whole Voices from one location to another It is used for copying parameter settings from an existing Voice to the current Voice you are editing WOE Copy CRPFIG iano Job randPr Current PRE 11 28 0H165 gt a 3 4 E 1 Source Voice Memory Select the Voice Memory containing the Voice source from which you will copy parameter settings I Settings PRE1 2 Preset 1 2 INT Internal Normal EXT External Normal PLG Plug in PRE Preset Drum INT Internal Drum EXT External Drum E 2 Source Voice Number Select the Voice Number of the source Voice The Voice Name is shown in the top line of the display Settings 001 128 for Preset Internal External Normal 1 64 for Plug in DR1 DR8 for Preset Drum DR1 DR2 for Internal External Drum E 3 Source Voice Parameter Select the parameter of the source Voice You can copy parameter settings common to all Elements or those used by individual Elements L Settings normal Voice Common all Elements EL1 EL4 Drum Voice Common all Drum Keys CO C6 Plug in Voice Common EL Element If the parameters of the source Voice Normal Drum Plug in differ from those of the Voice you are currently editing destination you will only be able to copy Common parameters E 4 Destination Element Drum Key Set the Element Drum Key of the d
176. hannel 2 The MIDI data is received by the synthesizer which then plays the Voice for the Part assigned to MIDI channel 2 Repeat steps to above but set up Part 3 for bass and to receive on MIDI channel 3 Repeat steps to again setting up Part 10 for drums and to receive on MIDI channel 10 To avoid situations where the Voices of unused Parts are suddenly played back you should set the MIDI receive channels for unused Parts to On wB There are many other Part specific parameters in Performance Edit Mode Details are given on Page 106 Before exiting Performance Edit Mode you need to store the settings for the Performance Details about storing Performances are given on Page 124 Now when you select this Performance in Performance Play Mode you can play back the song file on computer sequencer or internal sequencer and the piano bass and drum Parts will be played back according to each track s MIDI channel Performing Live while Playing Back a Song File While playing back the song file with the piano bass and drum Parts assigned earlier you can set up the Performance so that you can also play another Part live Playback using Performance keyboard Song Fie iN This is the same as the Performance created earlier but with the addition of another Part for live playback Regarding settings the important points are as follows e In the Performance created earlier Parts
177. he computer s serial port to the synthesizer s TO HOST terminal 2 MIDI connection the computer s MIDI interface or external MIDI interface to the synthesizer s MIDI IN and OUT Different computers require different connections as follows 1 Serial Port to TO HOST IBM PC AT HOSI SELECT ie Serial cable fo HOST S30 Macintosh HOST SELECT PC 2 Pe mi Serial cable TO HOST PS422 Apple Macintosh Modem or S30 Printer port 2 MIDI Interface to MIDI IN and OUT Using the computer s MIDI interface HOST SELECT moe PC im Mac Serial cable Rij ooo00000 oop0o00000 wit TTT Computer with MIDI interface Using an external MIDI interface HOST SELECT MIDI Interface MIDI OUT sale MIDI IN MIDI IN MIDI p e meme YAMAHA sa S30 I Be Pee Gooesood L ae Computer You will need to an appropriate MIDI application sequencer editor etc for your computer platform Connecting Controllers The S30 has controller jacks on the rear panel including FOOT SWITCH and FOOT CONTROLLER You can connect optional controllers like a Foot Switch the FC4 or FC5 and Foot Controller the FC7 to control t
178. he speed and a negative setting will reduce it Li Settings 64 0 63 Speed Slow Time Speed Fast Time E Delay Set the delay time between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect As shown in the illustration a positive setting will lengthen the delay and a negative setting will shorten it Li Settings 64 0 63 Short Delay Key on Long Delay Key on E PMod Pitch Modulation Depth Set the amount by which the LFO waveform controls the pitch A positive setting will increase the amount and a negative value will decrease it Li Settings 64 0 63 Plug in Common Effect In the following three screens you can set the parameters for the Insertion and System Effects used by the Plug in Voice The parameters are the same as for Normal Voices The EFF EF1 Insertion Effect parameter is the same as the EFF EF1 Insertion Effect 1 parameter of the Normal Voices Details are given on Page 73 EFF EF1 Insertion Effect EFF Rev Reverb EFF Cho Chorus Here you can set the Element related parameters for the Plug in Voice In the following two screens you can select the Element s waveform then it s velocity parameters OSC Assign Oscillator Assign OSC Velocity Oscillator Velocity 97 OSC Assign Oscillator Assign You can select the Board Voice that make up the Element in a Plug in Voice Use Knob C to select the Bank
179. he stereo pan position of the Part I Settings L63 Left C Center R63 Right E RevSend Reverb Send Set the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect 1 2 or the bypassed signal to the Reverb effect Li Settings 0 127 E ChoSend Chorus Send Set the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect 1 2 or the bypassed signal to the Chorus effect Li Settings 0 127 You can set Filter Envelope Generator and other parameters controlling the tonal characteristics of each Part The following four screens are available TON Filter Tone Filter TON EG Tone Envelope Generator TON Portamento Tone Portamento TON Other Tone Other TON Filter Tone Filter You can use filters to adjust the tone of each Part If the filter is an LPF and HPF combination the Cutoff parameter applies to the LPF These parameters are also available in the Common Quick Edit screens TONGFilters Cutoff Reso Partel 63 63 Details about the Filter are given on Page 78 E Cutoff Raise or lower the Cutoff frequency for each Element of a Part For each Element if a combined Low Pass and High Pass Filter is being used this parameter adjusts the Cutoff frequency of the Low Pass Filter L Settings 64 0 63 115 E Reso Resonance Set the amount of Resonance harmonic emphasis applied to the signal at the Cutoff frequency This adds further character to the sound L Settings 64 0 63 TON E
180. hen you turn the knob resonance will be applied to the sound of the internal tone generator but at the same time modulation information will be sent to the external MIDI device connected to the MIDI Out This aspect of the synthesizer makes it ideal for use as a master controller for controlling external MIDI devices Add an optional Foot Controller for even more control 4l The following procedure explains how you can assign a desired parameter to Knob A B or C You can assign any parameters that are common throughout the system for all Play Modes and any MIDI Control Change Numbers In the example Knob A will be set up to control Reverb Return Press the UTILITY key to enter Utility Mode MODE OVOICE PERFORM STORE SEQ OUTILITY OCARD OEA LILI PLAY OEDIT QO JOB STOP LJ OU L COMPARE Use the PAGE knob to switch to the CTRL KnobA System Control Knob A screen CTRL EnobAt CCH Dest Sos Bi CModiheel J EGLow G SHIFT PAGE A ce OOOO 6 PART ELEMENT DATA Use Knob 2 to select REV Rtn Reverb Return CTRL EnobA CCH Dest Sos Ai CModwheedl J FEW EtLA SHIFT PAGE A 29 0 00 PART ELEMENT 2 DATA Now you can use Knob A for on the fly control of the Reverb Return level in Voice Performance Play Mode Note that you can also send by turning Knob A or receive Control Change messages with the Controller Number set in the CC parameter through MIDI In an
181. hile the first hole ond half note 2nd 3 faitae ac let note is being played Note Off has not been received the 2nd half dot note 4thx4 whole note 4thx5 W ae ates Pigg Sasi p 5x4th nei ieee 6x4th notes 4t a7 7x4th synchronization with the second note and after notes 4thx8 8x4th notes Speed Slow Time Key on First Note Key on Second Note E Phase Set the phase at which the LFO Wave starts whenever a note is played Phases of 0 90 120 180 240 270 degrees are available Speed Fast We The length of the note depends on the internal or external ER MIDI tempo setting Phase 0 90 180 270 120 240 J Settings 0 90 120 180 240 270 71 Voice Mode spow DN LFO Fade E Delay Set the delay time before the LFO comes into effect A higher value means a longer delay time Li Settings 0 127 Short delay Key on Long delay Key on y E FadeIn Fade In Set the time taken for the LFO effect to be faded in after the Delay time has elapsed A higher value means a slower fade in Li Settings 0 127 Low FadeIn value Faster fade in Fadeln Max Key on Delay High FadeIn value Slower fade in Fadeln Delay 72 E Hold Set the length of time during which the LFO is held at its maximum level A higher value means a longer Hold time Li Settings 0 127 Hold Time E FadeOut Fade Out Set the time taken for
182. his set Ch01 to Ch04 respectively to the TrnsCh parameters in the MKB Transmit pages for Zones 1 to 4 For the TG and MIDI parameters set both on for Zones 1 to 3 For Zone 4 set off to TG and on to MIDI You can switch between multiple MKB Transmit screens using the Knob A Some of basic settings for four zones are now complete QSelect Zone01 again using the Knob A Open the MKB Note screen using the PAGE knob In this screen you can specify a key range for a Zone AK BENotesO0cLave Transrose Zone 1 11 Hote Limit L 2 GS In the MKB Note page you can also find other parameters such as Note Limit Transpose etc Refer to page 121 for more information about these parameters Set Note Limit zone key range with the lowest and highest notes using Knobs 1 lowest and 2 highest For Zone01 select C 2 for the lowest note and B1 for the highest Use the Knob A to switch to the MKB Note page for Zone02 As in the same manner in step select C2 for the lowest note and B2 for the highest Use again the Knob A to switch to the MKB Note screen for Zone03 As in the same manner in step select C3 for the lowest note and G8 for the highest Use the Knob one more time A to switch to the MKB Note page for Zone04 As in the same manner in step select C3 for the
183. ic sounds It supports optional Plug in Boards that provide other synthesis engines of your choice enabling the production of cutting edge synthesizer sounds You can play all these sounds using the synthesizer s automatic playback facilities such as the built in Arpeggiator and Sequencer The Quick Access feature lets you access various genres of sounds quickly and directly via the front panel Other features include Effects and Control Sets for controlling various sound parameters in real time using different controllers These features make this synthesizer ideal for every kind of live performance or studio work When editing a sound you can use the PAGE knob to switch between screens and five other knobs plus the DATA knob for changing parameter values This makes the process of editing sounds much easier and smoother To make the most use of your synthesizer you are encouraged to read through this manual After reading the manual please keep it in a convenient and safe place for future reference About This Manual This manual is basically divided into two sections E Basics Section Page 6 Explains how to get started with the synthesizer its overall structure and how to use its main features and functions E Reference Section Page 59 Explains the parameters in the synthesizer s various Modes Package Contents e Owner s Manual this book e Data List e PA 5C AC Adaptor e Installation Guide e CD ROM TOOLS
184. ice Category in the LCD will blink M7 F WCE Srch PEEL 128CH16390CPFE Pees Mer Humber Ctar Search SHIFT PAGE DATA 58 00 60 PART ELEMENT The different Voice Categories are listed on Page 65 Use Knob 2 the INC YES and DEC NO keys the DATA knob and Knob C to search for a Voice The selected voices are called up using each knob and key The functions of knobs and keys are given below ee ae P126CH1i63CPF anal pene Humber Ctar Search EXIT ENTER DATA Knob 2 Use this to switch between Voices in the selected Category Turn the knob clockwise to increment the voice number and anti clockwise to decrement it DATA knob or INC YES or DEC NO key You can scroll through Voices in the specified Category across the Memories Turning the DATA knob clockwise or press the INC YES key jumps to the next Voice number in the same Category in ascending order Similarly turning the DATA knob anti clockwise or press the DEC NO key jumps to the next Voice number in the same Category in descending order When you reach to the last first Voice in a Memory you can select the first last Voice in that Category in the next previous Memory by continuously turning the knob clockwise anti clockwise or pressing the INC YES DEC NO key Knob C Using the Knob C you can select a Voice one by one in the current Memory likewise for normal Voice selection Turning the knob clockwise jumps t
185. ice number is off Bulk data cannot be transmitted received because the device number is set to off af Device number mismatch Bulk data cannot be transmitted received because the device numbers don t match af Effect Flugin in slot Cannot be used because Slot contains a Effect Plug in Board lt lt Plu u in communication error Plug in Board in Slot is not working properly af Plugin tyre mismatch Sound requires a different Plug in Board to that inserted in Slot af PLG1686 not surrorted When used with a PLG100 series Plug in Board a data file of which File Type is plugin cannot be stored on a Memory Card a Executing Operation is being executed as How working Memory Card operation is being executed as How loading File is being loaded from Memory Card as How Saving a a File is being saved to Memory Card as How checking Flug in board Plug in Board is being checked after powering up the synthesizer as MIDI bulk receiving MIDI Bulk data is being received as MIDI bulk transmitting MIDI Bulk data is being transmitted a4 C 391280 Stored Sound has been stored as Completed Operation has completed as Are you sure 7 YES CHO Final confirmation as Qverwrite CYESI CHO There is a file already stored with the same name Replace it with a newer one with that name 144
186. ied to multiple notes 116 TON Other Tone Other You can set Pitch Bend Range and Velocity Sensitivity parameters for each Part Part 1 to 16 TONEOthers Pitch Bend Welberth Offset Partai 17 12 127 Eq Plug in Part Multi Plug in Part Drum Voice Part TOHG her Fitch Bend WelDerth Offset Far tPL 17 1zr 64 E Pitch Bend Set the amount in semitones by which the Voice pitch changes when the Pitch Bend Wheel is moved For example a Lower setting of 12 means that the pitch of the Voice drops by up to an octave when the Pitch Bend Wheel is moved downwards An Upper setting of 12 means that the pitch of the Voice rises by up to an octave when the Pitch Bend Wheel is moved upwards The Lower parameter is only available for Normal Voice Parts Parts 1 to 16 L Settings Lower Left 48 O 24 Upper Right 48 O 24 or 24 0 24 for Plug in and Multi Plug in Parts E VelDepth Offset Velocity Sensitivity Depth Offset Set the velocity sensitivity and velocity offset for each Part L Settings VelDepth Velocity Sensitivity 0 127 offset Velocity Offset 0 127 VelDepth Velocity Sensitivity Depth As illustrated below a large setting will cause large changes in velocity when you play the keyboard Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth with offset set to 64 Depth 127 Offset 64 Depth 64 Offset 64 Velocity at tone generator Depth 32 Offset 64
187. iler software are given in the separate Installation Guide eee The synthesizer can automatically load certain files All Plug in data when you switch it on Name the file to be loaded automatically as follows then save it to the highest directory of the Memory Card Insert the card into the CARD slot before switching the synthesizer on Data will be loaded automatically and any existing data in memory will be overwritten Therefore you should save important data to Memory Card or other media beforehand To prevent the automatic loading of files hold down the EXIT key when powering up the synthesizer Release the key when the Now checking plug in board message is displayed E All all data Name the file AUTOLOAD S2A to automatically load all data E Plugin Plug in data Name the file AUTOLD S2B to automatically load Plug in Board data Card Mode Operations Insert the Memory Card into the CARD slot Press the CARD key to enter Card Mode Use the PAGE knob to switch to the screen for the operation you wish to perform Savel Tyre Cursor Card all File A 7 44CHEWFILE S520 SHIFT PAGE A DATA e0000 PART ELEMENT In the first Status screen you don t need any further operation described in step 2 and after Use Knobs B C 1 and 2 to set each parameter Alternatively you can use the DATA knob and the DEC NO and INC YES keys To save
188. ilter cutoff frequency controlled by the Control Change set above Ll Settings 64 0 63 CTL AC Modulation AC Modulation Depth Here you can set the depth of control the Control Change messages Assignable Control have over the pitch filter and amplitude of the Plug in Voice CTLGAC Modulation FPMod Frio Abog Commor izr izr lyr 96 E PMod Pitch Modulation Depth Set the depth of control the Control Change messages selected in the Source parameter have over the pitch modulation The larger the setting the greater the depth of control Li Settings 0 127 E FMod Filter Modulation Depth Set the depth of control the Control Change messages selected in the Source parameter have over the filter cutoff modulation The larger the setting the greater the depth of control Li Settings 0 127 E AMod Amplitude Modulation Depth Set the depth of control the Control Change messages selected in the Source parameter have over the amplitude modulation The larger the setting the greater the depth of control Li Settings 0 127 y in Common LFO Low Frequency Oscillator You can set the LFO parameters here The LFO uses a low frequency waveform to vary modulate the pitch of the sound The vibrato effect for example makes use of the LFO LFO Param LFO Parameter LFO Farrar Sreec Delay Prod Commor 65 64 65 E Speed Set the speed of the LFO waveform A positive setting will increase t
189. ime Key on You can set Equalizer parameters for each Drum Key The following two screens are available These parameters are the same as for Normal Voices details are given on Page 86 EQ Type EQ Param EQ Parameter This parameter is only available if the Type parameter in the OSC Wave screen is set to wave Plug in Voices The Voices held on Plug in Board Single Part are known as Board Voices A Plug in Voice is a Board Voice that has been processed in the synthesizer in Voice Edit Mode There are six Common Edit screens and four screens for editing the Element of a Plug in Voice You can save up to 64 edited Plug in Voices in Banks A to D of Memory PLG After selecting the Plug in Voice you wish to edit in Banks A to D of Memory PLG when you enter Voice Edit Mode you will see the Voice Edit Mode screen that you had exited from previously eee You can monitor Board Voices without having to enter Edit Mode Also if you press the EDIT key while monitoring you will enter Edit Mode with the oscillators of the Board Voice already assigned QO While holding down the PLG key use Knob C to select the Board Voice s Bank PLG INT is the Bank of the Plug in Voice Plug in Internal stored in Memory PLG Release the PLG key Select the Board Voice using the BANK PROGRAM keys or DATA knob as in the same way to select a Voice from another memory If there is no Voice at the Program Number c
190. in Low Gain Set the amount by which signals below the LoFreq frequency will be boosted attenuated LiSettings 64 0 63 E HiFreq High Frequency Set the shelving point for the high frequencies The levels of signals above this frequency will be boosted attenuated by the amount set in the HiGain parameter Settings 500Hz 16 0kHz E HiGain High Gain Set the amount by which signals above the HiFreq frequency will be boosted attenuated L Settings 64 0 63 Plug in Element Native With a Plug in Board installed you have native and unique parameters to set up a Board Voice from the Plug in Board PLG NATIVE Plug in Native Native Part Parameters are displayed Use the PAGE knob to switch to the screen for the desired parameter then use Knob C and Knob 2 to enter the settings The parameters and number of screens will vary depending on the Plug in Board For details about each parameter and its functions refer to the Owner s Manual or the on line help that came with your Plug in Board Editing Plug in Board Voices Plug in Voices are based on Board Voices However the Board Voices themselves can be edited via computer using the included editor software Different editors are available for different Plug in Boards When using the editor while the synthesizer is in Voice Mode set the Part No in the editor to 1 Also make sure the synthesizer s Basic Receive channel is the s
191. in Voice in Memory Bank A to D of PLG Up to 64 can be stored in PLG MEMORY However only the Voice Edit parameters can be stored The edited Board Voice parameters cannot be stored Therefore you will lose all Board Voice edits when you switch your synthesizer off 99 To avoid this situation you should save your Board Voice edits to Memory Card and then load the data as a Plug in Voice After loading Board Voice data if you select Plug in Voice Memory PLG A to D the stored sound the edited Plug in Voice based on the Board Voice is loaded The all setting is not available when saving Board Voice data it is saved as a plugin file type If the file name is set such that the file loads automatically Page 136 the Board Voice data can also be loaded up when the synthesizer is switched on It may take a while to save or load the Board Voice data using Memory Card Details about saving loading data to from Memory Card are given on Page 137 The editor for the Plug in Board is a plug in program for XGworks lite You will need to be running Windows and XGworks lite in order to use it XGworks lite is included on the CD ROM included with this synthesizer Voice Mode spow DN Voice Job Mode You can perform various operations Jobs in Voice Job Mode For example you can Initialize Voices including those currently being edited or Recall previous edits When you enter Voice Job Mode
192. in Parts only 120 CTL Pend Piei Pend oiiaee nN AT TAEA 69 CTL MW Control MW Control Depth ercunerasssinisiinnai 95 CTL MW Control MW Control Depth Multi Plug in Parts only 119 CTE MW Modulatiofisesasnsrsinsisii tien N E 95 119 CTL Pitch Pitch Bend oococccccxeyncsvsevessesuencsevonvewssousensesdesnovesensevetbepsesdueavens 95 CELFONE oyeee tE En E E TNE 69 CTL Set1 Control Set 1 to CTL Set6 Control Set 6 voces 69 CTL Set1 Control Set 1 CTL Set2 Control Set 2 scsccsssascscnsiarorersceuvacs 95 CIEI ere CRON Sr sainincenccmmma mannan 129 CIRL Voce Controller eres cacccnstcsnsivacpnshecavacaznbsareuoveseomaseswmanainnenieaae 132 CITRL Assia Controller Assifn Ij asnssissnsiassiae 133 CTRL Assigns Controller Assidn 2 iiccicesseiavreoadivarioedenaenara 133 I aucune aT 129 Cre Oiler CO oer anna N 129 D DATA ches aa T 20 61 DEL Ea ET 8 DEE NOLE n ET 7 19 61 Ce AEAN EEA PE SNORE TP EEES RPT TRC VE OAD E RAN EI TEE TENT en 139 Maris TAL ie aicasc pic ptahpepnnnaterade macanaGe RERA 21 eed DOOS Fe praa e R R 144 Drom Common Po co vase esricaueuscemnanvondewkoinaie denen ewiesesepeeaikoneesonpvent 89 Piom Conmon OO let an 89 Drom Common Edit and Drum Key Edit passwividerercuaroninieeiarnin 88 Dion Cowman LE Seriei ai E 89 Lim ate Cerner iri 88 Dran Common Oek EiT aace EEA 88 JB igen a a EN Ji Droma Key RO Equalizer enrera NEER 92 De Bi len aa A 91 Drun Fey OTCA Osian esena 89 M 0 aA A N N em rar gi DED V
193. is can be used in combination with the Cutoff frequency of the Low Pass Filter to add further character to the sound L Settings 0 31 Details about Resonance are given on Page 80 E HPF High Pass Filter Set the Cutoff frequency of the High Pass Filter Only frequencies above this point are passed Li Settings 0 255 Details about the High Pass Filter are given on Page 79 You can set amplitude output level parameters for each Drum Key The following two parameters are available This parameter is only available if the Type parameter in the OSC Wave screen is set to wave AMP AEG Amplitude Envelope Generator AMP VelSens Amplitude Velocity Sensitivity Voice Mode spow DN AMP AEG Envelope Generator The Amplitude Envelope Generator controls the change in amplitude from the moment a note in pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released By setting the Attack Time Decay 1 Time and the Decay 1 2 Level you can determine how fast the sound reaches its peak amplitude and how it fades out Parameters can be set for each Drum Key This parameter is only available if the Type parameter in the OSC Wave screen is set to wave AMPGHEG Attack Decayl Leyel Decay Key C 3 12r 177 12r 176 E Attack Attack Time Set the Attack Time Li Settings 0 127 E Decayl1 Decay 1 Time Set the Decay Time Li Settings 0 127 E Level Decay 1 Level Set the Decay 1 Level Li Setting
194. it Level These parameters control the output level volume and pan position of the Voice GEDELevels Wool Pan FeyvSend ChoSend C 1234 izr 12r 177 E Vol Volume Set the output level of the Voice Li Settings 0 127 E Pan Set the stereo pan position of the Voice LW Settings L63 Left C Center R63 Right E RevSend Reverb Send Set the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect 1 2 or the bypassed signal to the Reverb effect Li Settings 0 127 E ChoSend Chorus Send Set the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect 1 2 or the bypassed signal to the Chorus effect Li Settings 0 127 QED EffectCtrl Quick Edit Effect Set the amount of Chorus applied to the entire Voice GEDEERFectCttr 1 3 Chorus C 1234 63 E Chorus Set an offset value for the parameters used by each type of Chorus Li Settings 64 0 63 QED Filter Quick Edit Filter These parameters control filters which affect the tonal quality of the Voice If you are using LPF Low Pass Filter and HPF High Pass Filter combined together the parameters in the QED Filter page only affects LPF HEDEF ilteri C 1234 Cutoff Reso 63 63 E Cutoff Set the cutoff frequency The frequency set here will be a center frequency for signals to be filtered when they pass through each filter Li Settings 64 0 63 E Reso Resonance Set the amount of Resonance harmonic boost applied to the
195. it Recall function are given on Page 100 When creating a new Voice from scratch it can be useful prior to editing to clear the settings for the current Voice using the Initialize Voice function in Voice Job Mode Page 100 Normal Voice When editing Normal Voices there are 12 settings consisting of six Common Edit settings common to all four Elements and six Element specific settings Voice Edit Mode Common Common General 6 t GEN Name General Name 65 GEN Other General Other _ 66 Common Quick Edit 66 t QED Level Quick Edit Level __ 66 QED EffectCtrl Quick Edit Effect Control _ 66 QED Filter Quick Edit Filter 67 QED EG Quick Edit Envelope Generator 67 Common Arpeggio 67 ARP Type Arpeggio Type __ 67 ARP Limit Arpeggio Note Limit __ 68 ARP Mode Arpeggio Mode __ 68 ARP PlayEF Arpeggio Play Effect ___ 68 Common Controllee Y_ 699 CTL Portamento 69 CTL Bend Pitch Bend _ 69 CTL Seti Cont
196. itch Hold 123 oF ort A J 4 BigBeat Ctk 127 SHIFT PAGE A 59 OQ c 1 2 PART ELEMENT la e e Setting the Note Limit Using the Note Limit parameter let s set up a Normal Voice say Voice Program Number 098 G02 of Internal champ such that the Arpeggiator is enabled in the lower part of the keyboard but the upper part can be used to play melody lines You ll need to have already set the Arpeggio Type say MuteLine 37 The Note Limit parameters can be set in the ARP Limit screen which follows immediately after the ARP Type screen mentioned in step earlier Use the PAGE knob to switch to the screen imiti Hote Limit 4 C 2 GSB SHIFT PAGE DATA O OOOO PART ELEMENT uvse Knob 2 to jump to the parameter for the highest note in the range and to set the note Alternatively you can set this parameter by pressing the note say E3 on the keyboard while holding down the SHIFT key Similarly the lowest note in the range can be set using Knob 1 or by pressing the note while holding down the SHIFT key ie mits Hote Limit A i C 4 C 1 E 3 SHIFT PAGE A o0 00000 SS PART ELEMENT DATA Knobs 1 and 2 are used to set the Note Limits of the keyboard range within which the arpeggiator will play back The cursor F immediately jumps to each respective parameter when Knobs 1 and 2 are used Once the cursor is at the parameter you can also use the DATA knob
197. itch of each Element The Pitch Envelope Generator PEG controls the change in pitch from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the point at which the sound has faded out completely The following six screens are available PCH Tune Pitch Tune PEG VelSens PEG Velocity Sensitivity PEG Time PEG Time PEG Level PEG Level PEG Release PEG Release PCH Scale Pitch Scale PCH Tune Pitch Tune You can set the tuning parameters and the effectiveness of the Envelope Generator EG for each Element PCHETune J EGDerth Coarse Fine Fandom ELi 34 635 A 7 E EGDepth Set the amount of change applied by the PEG A setting of zero means the original pitch is not changed Li Settings 64 0 63 Voice Mode spow DN E Coarse Adjust the pitch of each Element in semitones L Settings 48 0 48 E Fine Fine tune the pitch of each Element L Settings 64 0 63 E Random Set the amount by which the pitch of each Element is varied at random for each note you press A setting of zero means the original pitch is not changed Li Settings 0 127 PEG VelSens You can determine how the Pitch Envelope Generator PEG responds to note velocity Time Seoment 65 attack 2 S5ens3 Lengel 4 65 E Level Set the velocity sensitivity of the PEG Level Positive settings will cause the level to rise the harder you play the keyboard and negative values will cause it to fall Ll Setting
198. ite protect seal from the Card Do not reuse the seal that is peeled off E Data Backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate Memory Cards This gives you a backup if one Memory Card is lost or damaged E Burglarproof Lock This instrument is equipped with a burglarproof lock for the Memory Card If necessity arises mount the burglarproof lock onto the instrument To mount the burglarproof lock Remove the metallic part using a Phillips screwdriver Turn the metallic part upside down and then mount it again Card Mode spow pb You will see the 1st screen Status when you enter Card Mode The following seven screens are available each for a different operation Ist screen Status 2nd screen Save 3rd screen Load 4th screen Rename 5th screen Delete 6th screen MkDir Make Directory 7th screen Format Details about how to enter Card Mode are given on Page 17 File Types You can handle the following five types of files to your synthesizer E all All Data All data in the synthesizer and in External Memory data are treated as a single file and can be saved loaded as such L Extension S2A Plug in Board data cannot be saved System Performance and Plug in voice data can only be saved in this format E all voice All Voice Data All Voice data in the synthesizer 128 Normal Voices 2 Drum Voices and in External Memory 1
199. keyboard The Center parameter is used as the basic pitch for this parameter A positive setting will cause the pitch of lower notes to change slower and that of higher notes to change faster Negative values will have the opposite effect Ll Settings 64 0 63 E Center Center Key Set the basic pitch used by the EGTime parameter When the Center Key note is played the PEG behaves according to its actual settings The pitch change characteristics for other notes will vary in proportion to the EGTime settings L Settings C 2 G8 You can also set this parameter by pressing the respective note on the keyboard while holding down the SHIFT key Positive value Speed of PEG i pitch change Lower range Higher range Basic pitch Negative value Speed of PEG pitch change Lower range Higher range Basic pitch Voice Mode spow DN You can set Filter parameters to change the tonal characteristics of each Element The following ten screens are available FLT Type Filter Type FLT HPF High Pass Filter FLT Sens Filter Sensitivity FEG VelSens FEG Velocity Sensitivity FEG Time FEG Level FEG Release FLT KeyFlw Filter Key Follow FLT Scale Filter Scale Break Point FLT Scale Filter Scale Offset FLT Type Filter Type E Type Set the Filter Type Parameters will vary according to the Type FLTET4Fe __TYFe Gain Cutoff Reso ELi234 LPF12 HPF aa oa Zo 31 L Settings LPF12 HPF Low
200. l Voice Drum Voice or Plug in Part By switching on the Layer Switch parameter for different Parts up to four you can play back rich layered sounds in Performance Play Mode You can also create splits so that different Parts are assigned to different areas of the keyboard If you assign a different MIDI channel number to each Part each track of a sequencer can play back a different Part Performance Part 1 16 Plug in Part hr reas Layered Voices Performance ANHA Part 1 16 Plug in Part Song MIDI CH GHI 1 16 i Diff Voi Pe ifferent Voice Q f equencer S e For Each part ii In Performance Mode several different Voices Parts can be layered to create rich textures However this can cause note response to become slower under some circumstances ideal for Playing Live Many features of this synthesizer make it ideal for live performances These features are explained here a Using the Controllers Page 38 Using the Arpeggiator Page 36 A wide variety of arpeggio patterns can be created automatically by just holding down a set of notes on the keyboard You can specify the sound and the note range within which the arpeggiator is active then use your left hand to hold down the notes being arpeggiated while The Pitch Bend Wheel Modulation Wheel and Control Sliders can be freely assigned to control various sound parameters in real time By connecting an optional Foot Controller or Foot
201. lable OSCEP arn Par Alt Fandor Ke C L BS er 63 E Pan Set the Pan position for each sound in a Drum Voice Drum Kit This will also be used as the basic Pan position for the Alternate and Random settings T Settings L63 Left C Center R63 Right 90 E Alter Alternate Set the amount by which the sound is panned alternately left and right for each note you press The Pan setting is used as the basic Pan position T Settings L64 Left 0 Center R63 Right This parameter is only available if the Type parameter in the OSC Wave screen is set to wave If set to vce Normal Voice this parameter is unavailable E Random Set the amount by which the sound is panned randomly left and right for each note you press The Pan setting is used as the basic Pan position Li Settings 0 127 This parameter is only available if the Type parameter in the OSC Wave screen is set to wave OSC Other Oscillator Other You can set parameters which govern the sound of each Drum Key making up the Drum Voice OSCBAOther 3 At219n RcovHtorf AltLGre Key C 3 single ori oft E Assign Set Key Assign to single to prevent the doubled playback of the same received notes Select multi to consecutively assign each instance of the same received note to a separate channel Li Settings single multi When the Alternate Group AltGrp parameter is set to other than off you cannot se
202. layed or be controlled individually using the built in or an external sequencer Up to 128 Performances can be stored in the internal memory and up to 64 on Memory Card These Performance settings are available in Performance Edit Mode Page 106 Here we will show how to get started with Performance Play after selecting a Performance PRE1 PRE2 o MODE i OBypass OkevEOARD OVOCE PERFORM STORE K A PIANO E PIANO ORGAN GTR BASS STRINGS BRASS SYNTH _ ZBE CE AE 2 DATA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 JUJUL PERFORM key DEC NO and INC YES keys MEMORY key DATA knob Press the PERFORM key Press a MEMORY key The PERFORM key LED will light showing that you are now in Performance Play Mode The following appears in the display MODE VOICE PERFORM STORE OuTILITY OcarD CO FQ LJ CJL PLAY OEeEDIT Q JOB STOP COMPARE PFM Flas IHT 0 ic ABi iC Init Perf J ER Low Ell Mid Eli Hi 1 4 At this point you can play the Performance named on the screen via keyboard There are two Performance Memories INT internal and EXT External INT consists of 128 Performances divided into eight Banks A to H EXT consists of 64 Performances divided into four Banks A to D PRE1 PRE 2 INT EXT PLG C DRUM INT Internal A H EXT External Wa D k ON INT internal is stored in internal Random Access Memory RAM and contains factory default Performances These can
203. lays PRE1 amp AB Init Perf J BicAed E iLow G EGMid G EGQHi G 2 Performance Play Mode press the EXIT key to return Page 102 to Voice Play Mode Press the PERFORM key its LED will light to enter Piss a pri init Uoieed Performance Mode To exit to another Mode simply press the respective key for that Mode FFM Plays Ce eae ee Ferf J EQiLow G EGMid G EGHi When in each Play Mode you can swiftly switch to each respective Job Mode by simply pressing the JOB key its LED will light 4 Voice Job Mode Page 100 Press the JOB key in Voice Play Mode To exit to another Mode simply press the respective key for that Mode or press the EXIT key to return to Voice Play Mode WCE Initialize Job Current Moize 4 Performance Job Mode Page 123 Press the JOB key while in Performance Play Mode To exit to another Mode simply press the respective for that Mode or press the EXIT key to return to Performance Play Mode FFM Initialize Job Current Perform 4 Utility Job Mode Page 134 Press the JOB key in Utility Mode To exit to another Mode press the respective key for that Mode or press the EXIT key to return to Utility Mode UTIL Factory Seti Job 5 Utility Mode Page 127 Press the UTILITY key its LED will light to enter Utility Mode To exit to another Mode simply press the respective key for that Mode MoLeSRITE Tune MHSTE TG LJ Sus 1 63 182 3c ol 2r
204. ll flowing to the instrument at a minimum level When not using the S30 for an extended period of time be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet Before you switch your synthesizer on or off first turn down the volume of any audio equipment connected to it Press the STANDBY ON switch E T DBY Jehe L 30 A splash screen is displayed briefly The Voice or Performance Play Mode screen appears next WCE Plays PRE1 661 A81 CPF StereoGrnd E iLow G EQMid G EQHi G ChoSend FeySend 14 If you have a Memory Card inserted in the instrument s CARD slot or an optional Plug in Board installed you may see other screens before the Voice or Performance Play Mode screen is displayed If a previously used Memory Card is inserted in the CARD slot you will see a screen while files in EXT Memory are being loaded If anew Memory Card one never used on the instrument is inserted in the CARD slot you will see a screen while a basic file is being created in EXT Memory If you have a Plug in Board installed you will see a screen that confirms the presence of the Plug in Board The final screen after the power on sequence may change depending on the Power On Mode setting available Utility Mode Page 128 Turn up the amplifier s volume as necessary Adjust the synthesizer s VOLUME slider to set an appropriate volume level You can save various kinds of data Voic
205. locities Li Settings 0 200 If the Velocity value falls below 1 it will be limited to 1 If it exceeds 127 it will be limited to 127 E Gate Gate Time Set the Gate Time Rate value the length of a note This determines how the original Gate Times are increased or decreased during Arpeggio playback A setting of 100 means the original values are used Settings below 100 will shorten the gate times of the Arpeggio notes whereas settings above 100 will lengthen them Li Settings 0 200 If the Gate Time value falls below 1 it will be limited to 1 Common Controller There are eight Control Settings You can set the Controller parameters for Portamento the Pitch Bend Wheel and for each Element in a Voice CTL Portamento CTL Bend Pitch Bend CTL Set1 Control Set 1 CTL Set2 Control Set 2 CTL Set3 Control Set 3 CTL Set4 Control Set 4 CTL Set5 Control Set 5 CTL Set6 Control Set 6 CTL Portamento Set the Portamento parameters Portamento will create a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played to the next Switch Time CTLGFortamentas Mode C 1234 Or 127F fulltime E Switch Switch Portamento on or off Li Settings off on E Time Set the pitch transition time Higher values mean longer transition times Li Settings 0 127 E Mode Set the Portamento mode The behavior of the Portamento varies depending on whether Mode in GEN Other is set to mono or poly
206. lower notes and faster changes for higher notes A negative setting will have the opposite effect L Settings 64 0 63 E Center Center Key Set the basic note used by the EGTime parameter When the Center Key note is played the FEG behaves according to its actual settings The pitch change characteristics for other notes will vary in proportion to the EGTime settings _i Settings C 2 G8 You can also set this parameter by pressing the respective note on the keyboard while holding down the SHIFT key Positive value Speed of FEG level change Lower range Higher range Basic Pitch Negative value Speed of FEG level change Lower range Higher range Basic Pitch 82 FLT Scale Filter Scale Break Point You can set four Filter Scaling Break Points for each Element Filter Scaling controls the filter cutoff frequency according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard There are four Break Points used to divide and assign different settings across the keyboard The Levels Offsets at each of Break Point are set in the FLT Scale screen Details about Filter Scaling are given later in the section Filter Scaling Settings FLTGScale gt EPI BP2 BPS BP4 ELi234 L 2 CS CHS G5 E BP1 BP2 BP3 BP4 Break Point 1 2 3 4 Set the Break Points for each Element BP1 to BP4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard Li Settings BP1 to BP4 C 2 G8 FL
207. lume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician E REPLACING THE BACKUP BATTERY This instrument contains a non rechargeable internal backup battery which permits internal data to remain stored even when the power is off When the backup battery needs replacing the message Change internal battery will display in the LCD When this happens immediately back up your data then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery Do not attempt to replace the backup battery yourself in order to prevent the possible serious hazards Always have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery Never place the backup battery in a location that a child can reach since a child might accidentally swallow the battery If this should happen consult a physician immediately E SAVING USER DATA Always save data to a Memory Card SmartMedia frequently in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument or data that is lost or destroyed Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha S30 Music Synthesizer Your new S30 synthesizer incorporates the highly acclaimed AWM2 synthesis engine allowing the creation of super realist
208. me Time FLT KeyFlw Filter Key Follow You can set Filter Key Follow parameters for each Element This parameter controls the Filter Cutoff and FEG behavior according to the position of the notes played on the keyboard The availability of the Filter Key Follow parameter depends on the Break Point and Offset settings in the FLT Scale screen FLTGKeyFlwiatutoftf Center EGTime Center EL1234 2007 CO 3 B35 C 3 spow DN E Cutoff Set the Filter Key Follow ratio the amount by which the Filter Cutoff varies according to note position for each Element A Center Key setting of C3 is used as the basic setting by the Cutoff parameter A positive setting will lower the Cutoff frequency for lower notes and raise it for higher notes A negative setting will have the opposite effect Li Settings 200 0 200 E Center Center Key This shows that the basic Level is at note C3 At this note the tone remains unchanged For other notes the tone varies according to the Level settings The Center setting cannot be changed This parameter is for information only Large Speed of cutoff frequency change Small Lower range Center Basic Pitch Higher range E EGTime Set the Time Scale the speed of change in the FEG over the range of the keyboard for each Element The basic speed of change for the FEG is at the note specified in the Center parameter A positive setting will cause slower changes for
209. ments Here the parameters common to all Elements are explained e GEN Common General Here you can set general parameters in Common Edit such as the Voice Name GEMNENames CLory a z H Cursor C 1234 CPF Tait Woiced e OED Common Quick Edit These parameters mostly control the volume and tone of the Voice and you can easily change the overall sound Pan FeyvSend ChoSend Lz 12r e ARP Common Arpeggio By setting these parameters you can control how the Voice is arpeggiated Details about how to use the Arpeggiator are given on Page 36 Hold AFFET 9Fe TFE Teneo Switch C H or 1734 UrP amp Downli 54 128 D e CTL Common Controller You can assign various functions to the controllers on the front rear panel For example you can assign parameters to the Pitch Bend Wheel and a Foot Controller so that you can change the tone of the Voice in real time Details about various different uses are given on Page 38 CTLGSet 13 Src EL Sw Dest Derth C 1234 FCCH4 gt ReyTime EFl 1234 63 e LFO Common Low Frequency Oscillator These are the LFO parameters The LFO uses a low frequency waveform to vary the pitch filter amplitude characteristics and can be used to create vibrato wah tremolo and other effect Page 70 LFOUBWave Wave Speed KeyReset Phase C 1234 PFZ 5 EFF Common Effect These are the Effects parameters for the Voice There are two Insertion Effects plus two System Effects
210. mited to drum patterns You can also select Arpeggio Types for backing chords The on off state of the Arpeggiator can be stored basslines and so on Pages 101 124 for each Voice Performance Voice Performance this means that the Arpeggiator will be ready for use whenever you select the Voice Performance When setting the Arpeggio Category to Ct Control you also need to set the Key Mode Selecting the Arpe T parameter two screens ahead to direct Press the EDIT key in Voice Play Mode You Sq Sequence Creates a general arpeggio phrase Mainly octave will enter Voice Edit Mode at the screen where up down phrases you previously exited Ph Phrase Creates more musical phrases than Sq Starting MODE with Techno there are phrases for a wide variety of musical genres and for creating backing tracks for guitar piano and other instruments OVOICE PERFORM STORE Quni Qcand Opty Dr Drum Pattern Creates drum pattern type phrases Phrase genres Ocp OJoB ror covered include rock and dance This Type is ideal for use with drum and percussion sounds re Ct Control Creates tonal changes No note information is created The Key Mode parameter in Arpeggio Mode must be set to direct Details about Arpeggio Types are given in the separate Data List 36 Using the Arpeggiator Use Knob 1 to set the Arpeggiator Switch parameter to on You can hold down multiple notes to creat
211. n The save operation will be canceled if you press the DEC NO key during execution When saving a file the Card full message will be displayed if the space left on the Memory Card is insufficient Free up space by deleting unwanted data and so on then try saving the file again e If you have selected a File Type other than perf or voice A confirmation message is displayed before loading Load Tyre Files WOTCEDIR SUBDIR 1 a4 Are you sure CYESI CHO Pe The synthesizer will automatically select an appropriate location in its internal memory according to the file type being loaded If you enter the name of a file that already exists you n f E S will see the Overwrite Are you sure confirmation If you have selected perf or voice as the File message before saving Type Take care not to overwrite important data held on You will further have to specify the type of data and Memory Card the location to which the file will be loaded File Name Settings Use Knobs B C 1 and 2 to select the file and the location to which it will be loaded The procedure for renaming files is basically the Alternatively you can use the DATA knob and the same as for renaming Voices However you cannot use symbols or lower case characters and the name can only be up to eight characters in length Details about renaming Voices are given on Page 65 DEC NO and INC YES keys
212. n process is canceled and the original Performance is reinstated If the Bank has already been selected this step is not required Details about Banks are given on Page 24 104 Press a PROGRAM key 1 to 16 to select a Program Number Performances can be selected by setting the Memory Bank and Program Number as explained in the three steps given above The display also shows the selected Performance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Multi Edit Volume Pan Reverb Chorus Send Note Shift You can set the output level volume stereo pan and other parameters for each Part using the graphic editors on screens 3 to 7 You can for example adjust each Parts Volume and Pan parameters in real time while using the synthesizer as a multitimbral tone generator with a sequencer The same procedure applies to screens 3 to 7 PFA Mlt Uolume Fart 127 L arta TTT iT TIT Titi ttt i SHIFT PAGE DATA 20000000 ELEMENT Use the PAGE knob to select the screen Use Knob A to select the Part You can choose from PartPL Plug in Part PartO1 to Part16 Voice Part 1 to 16 Apart from the 7th screen Note Shift the Common Layer Common parameters are the same for all Layer Parts The parameter settings for each Part are shown as a bar graph giving you an idea of the overall sound balance You can also use the MEMORY and PART keys on the front panel to select each Part The keys relate
213. n also use the DATA knob or DEC NO and INC YES keys to perform this operation When you press the ENTER key you will be prompted for confirmation WEG CPt GrandPi ano a Are You sure Press the INC YES key to confirm The message Executing will be displayed while the Job is being processed When it has completed you will see the message Completed and you will be returned to Voice Play Mode You can press the DEC NO key to cancel the Job This will return you to the original screen Voice Mode spow SIUDWIO 194 Performance Play In Performance Play Mode multiple Voices up to four Parts can be layered to create thick sounds which you can play in real time or using a sequencer In Performance Mode up to 17 Parts can be combined in a single Performance including Voices for the 16 Parts plus Plug in Part Depending on the Performance Edit settings Page 106 you can assign a Normal Voice or Drum Voice Drum Kit to each Part Multiple Parts can be assigned to the same MIDI channel for real time playback Alternatively you can assign each Part to a different MIDI channel for playback using an external sequencer or the synthesizer s internal sequencer in Sequence Play Mode The synthesizer can hold up to 192 Performances consisting of 128 Internal Performances plus another 64 External Performances on Memory Card The displayed screens the method of selecting Performances and th
214. n be simultaneously applied to both pitch and filter parameters and to parameters specific to individual Elements The following four settings are available LFO Wave LFO Fade LFO Dest1 LFO Destination 1 LFO Dest2 LFO Destination 2 LFO Wave LFOUGWayves Wave Speed KeyReset Phase C 1234 PFZ re E Wave Select the LFO Wave Depending on the Wave selected you can create different kinds of modulated sounds The following 12 LFO waveforms are available L Settings tri tri saw up saw dw squ1 4 squ1 3 squ squ2 3 squ3 4 trpzd S H 1 S H 2 tri saw up saw dw squ SZ23 trpzd E KeyReset Key on Reset Set whether the LFO is reset each time a note is pressed The following three settings are available Li Settings off each on 1st on off The LFO is self running no synchronization and starts a waveform at any phase when you play on the keyboard S H 1 Time f Key on S H 2 each on The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase parameter see below Time E Speed Set the speed of the LFO Wave modulation Higher Keron Ta Kaie eyon e Note values mean faster modulation speeds Ist on Settings 0 63 16th 16th note 16th 3 16th note The LFO resets with every note you play and starts the triplet 16th 16th dot note 8th 8th note waveform at the phase specified by the Phase parameter ie A e a ee Show below If you play a second note w
215. ncy Oscillator Screens As its name suggests the LFO creates waveforms of a low frequency These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch filter or amplitude of each Element to create effects such as vibrato wah and tremolo although the actual available LFO parameters will vary according to the type of Element Bllave Wares Speed Ke wsyrnc 24 tri 63 ort EQ Equalizer Screens Specific frequency bands for each Element can be attenuated or boosted using an equalizer There are many types of equalizers available Details are given on Page 86 O Storing Edited Voices Up to 128 new edited Normal Voices and 2 new edited Drum Voices can be stored to internal user memory or external Memory Card Voice Store INT EXT Normal Voice Normal Voice 128 128 Drum Voice Drum Voice 2 2 The maximum number of Plug in Voices that can be stored to internal memory PLG is 64 When storing a Voice any existing data at the storage location will be lost You should always back up important data to Memory Card computer or some other storage medium beforehand Details about storing Voices are given on Page 101 In the final stages of programming you can set the effects parameters to further change the sound s character To generalize System Effects apply to the overall sound whether it is a Voice a Performance a Song etc Insertion Effects on the other hand can be applied individually to
216. nd Knob 1 2 to adjust parameters assigned to them When you use each knob the value of its assigned parameter is displayed briefly knob A to C PFM Flas INT 128 HiealCPPi Init Ferf J 63 EQ Mid E Hi 4 SHIFT PAGE A B c 1 2 DATA PART ELEMENT Details about assigning parameters to Knobs A to C are given on Pages 41 129 Details about assigning parameters to Knob 1 2 are given on Pages 42 69 Setting Viewing Octave and MIDI Transmit Channel Parameters In Performance Play Mode the current Octave and MIDI Transmit Channel settings are shown while you hold down the SHIFT key The display varies depending on whether Master Keyboard Mode is on or off Details about Master Keyboard Mode are given on Page 108 Master Keyboard Mode is off Octave MIDI Transmit Channel ie IHT 128 H16 CFf Init Ferf J Ich 13 SHIFT PAGE A O OOO 6 PART ELEMENT DATA Use Knob A while holding down the SHIFT key to select the MIDI Transmit Channel 1 to 16 Master Keyboard Mode is on Octave Zone 1 to 4 erf J hott COnt 35 Ase CTCH NEB LichHi ichhl 3 DATA Use Knob B C 1 2 while holding down the SHIFT key to select the MIDI Transmit Channel 1 to 16 fi Init F schis 4 SHIFT PAGE A PART ELEMENT The notes you play in Performance Play Mode will be transmitted on this MIDI channel When the master keyboard mode is turned off
217. nel can be assigned a number of controller parameters By using a foot controller for parameter control both your hands are left free to play the keyboard or to operate other controllers This is very convenient if you are playing live Foot Controller parameters can be set for each Voice Foot Switch An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 Foot Switch connected to the rear panel FOOT SWITCH jack Page 13 can be assigned to a range of parameters It is suited for a switch type on off controls such as Portamento Switch increment decrement of a Voice or Performance Number start stop of the Sequencer holding Arpeggiator on or off The Foot Switch is not well suited for continuous control You could also use it to switch to between different Voices or Performances The parameter assigned to the Foot Switch is set in the CTRL Other screen of Utility Mode Pages 43 129 Aftertouch Aftertouch lets you for example add vibrato to a sound by applying further pressure to a note on the keyboard while it is being held down This allows real time expression and control Aftertouch can be used to control a wide variety of parameters Page 69 Control Sets Aside from their default parameters keyboard aftertouch the controllers and some of the knobs on the front panel can be assigned with various parameters as explained on Page 38 For example you could assign Resonance to the Modulation Wheel and set aftertouch to apply vibrato Yo
218. nema 99 Dent Dopa oraria AE 46 65 88 93 106 127 PC T ra T ER 66 Met 1 S E A E E E 130 MOLA MD SAG hae 130 EON Rl AB Channel sesi 130 MIDI GM XG Receive if a Multi Part Plug in Board has been installed 131 MODLIT OUT and THRU Cane Oi eaa 8 MIDI Tater ee to MIDI IN and OUT serriesiand 13 POL A AAE A ree ne Tee 131 MIDI Sw MIDI Receive Switch seiseriicnin ri 130 TE E E EEIN AENEASE NEAN EEEN ET A E EREN 115 iL SB E A een ome E T E E E E E Sererree 114 MKB Assign Master Keyboard Assign cccccccesscessessceseceseesseeseeesees Ie MKE Note Master Keyboard Note gciicsiinstsararersariovenviepetatustanineionrapnns 121 MEB Transmit Master Keyboard Tronsinil hensen 121 MKB TxPreset1 Master Keyboard Transmit Preset 1 ccccce 122 MKB TxPreset2 Master Keyboard Transmit Preset 2 c ccc0ee 122 MKB TxSw1 Master Keyboard Transmit Switch 1 121 MKB TxSw2 Master Keyboard Transmit Switch 2 iersinii 121 MKB TxSw3 Master Keyboard Transmit Switch 3 121 MKB TxSW4 Master keyboard Transmit Switch 4 0 122 Dr CN e Dre kanen RE 140 WTAE SE OAA AE AIIAN MEE EN OEA T PE TAEA EEE E N 7 MODULAR SYNTHESIS PLUG IN SYSTEM erresires 28 MODULATION TIOE l oia E 6 Monitoring Board VolGES osassa 93 De A C OE ceeded ees 19 20 MOT raen MST ir aR 127 MSTR EF Bypass Master Effect Bypass esennesnionnonmnia 128 MST Khi Master Keyboard enrerrid a 127 METT O er OD E aA 128 MSTR TG Master Tone Generator seripciiarnarn
219. nhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6 P O Box 260 SF 00101 Helsinki Finland Tel 09 618511 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Neeringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P O Box 8120 IS 128 Reykjavik Iceland Tel 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH SiemensstrafSe 22 34 25462 Rellingen ER of Germany Tel 04101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation International Marketing Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH SiemensstrafSe 22 34 25462 Rellingen ER of Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21 128 Jebel Ali Freezone P O Box 17328 Dubai U A E Tel 971 4 81 5868 ASIA HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd 11 F Silvercord Tower 1 30 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 2737 7688 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Gu Seoul Korea Tel 02 3486 0011 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 703 0900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J
220. nsition time from the point at which the note on the keyboard is released to the point at which the output level of the Part reaches zero A positive value will lengthen the transition time and a negative value will shorten it This parameter is not available for Drum Voice Parts Ll Settings 64 0 63 TON Portamento Tone Portamento You can set the following three Portamento parameters for each Part Part 1 to 16 Swi tok Time TONGFortamentas Mode Parte l on ler fulltime Plug in Part Multi Plug in Part TONGFPortamentoas Switch Time Parti on T E Switch Portamento switch Switch Portamento on or off With Portamento switched on there will be a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played to the next note Li Settings off on E Time Portamento Time Set the pitch transition time Higher values mean longer transition times Li Settings 0 127 E Mode Portamento Mode Select the Portamento Mode The Portamento Mode behavior varies according to the Part Mode mono poly setting in the LYR Mode screen Page 117 This parameter is not available for Plug in and Multi Plug in Parts L Settings fingered fulltime If Part Mode is set to mono fingered Portamento is applied when the keyboard is played legato a note is played before the previous note is released full Portamento is applied for all playing styles If Part Mode is set to poly Portamento is appl
221. nt When the Mode is set to layer the MIDI channel for one layered Zone Part is set here Li Settings ch01 ch16 You can also quickly set the Upper Lower MIDI channels using the PART keys 1 to 16 Press and hold one PART key then press another The number of the first key is set as the Upper MIDI channel while the number of the second key is set as the Lower MIDI channel E Upper When the Mode see above has been set to split this sets the MIDI channel assigned to notes above the split point The Part or Voice set to this MIDI channel will be played when you press notes above the split point When the Mode is set to layer the MIDI channel for the other layered Zone Part is set here Li Settings ch01 ch16 You can also quickly set the Upper Lower MIDI channels using the PART keys 1 to 16 Press and hold one PART key then press another The number of the first key is set as the Upper MIDI channel while the number of the second key is set as the Lower MIDI channel E Point When the Mode see earlier has been set to split this sets the split point The actual note of the split point will be assigned to the upper section You can also select the split point by pressing the note while holding down the SHIFT key L Settings C 2 G8 Master keyboard setting list on split layer a Prameter Name Zonet Zone Zone3 Zone4 Zonet Zone Zone3 Zone4 ch cnt ch ch TG on on
222. o the next Voice number Turning the knob anti clockwise jumps to the previous Voice number DEC NO_ INC YES If the Voice within the selected Category cannot be found within the current Voice Memory is displayed in the LCD and you will not be able to use Knob 2 Press the ENTER key to start searching in the next Memory Using Quick Access you can quickly select any of 12 types of Preset Voices and 4 types of Internal Voices at their factory default settings in each Bank according to their Categories The procedure is as follows Details about the Voices that can be selected using Quick Access are given in the separate Data List Press the OUICK ACCESS key in Voice Mode Its LED will light and Quick Access will be enabled WCE Quick 3 INT 81 Pr CHa CPF GrandF iano EQLow G EQMid G EHi G FLT Fra ChoSend Press the key again or switch to another Mode to disable Quick Access When you enable Quick Access the Voice you previously selected using Quick Access is selected again If you enable Quick Access while editing a Voice the Voice is not changed until you select another Voice via Quick Access You cannot use the MEMORY keys while Quick Access is enabled Ouse BANK keys A to H to select the Category There are eight Categories as listed below The Category names are printed below the respective BANK keys O QUICK ACCESS H A PIANO E PIANO SYNTH OTHER ORGAN GTR BASS STR
223. o the sound With the BPF the Band parameter is used to set the range band of signal frequencies passed by the filter With the BEF it is used to set the band of signal frequencies attenuated by the filter In both cases the Cutoff frequency is the center frequency of the band With the BPFW the Width parameter is used to adjust the width of the band of signal frequencies passed by the filter Li Settings 0 31 FLT HPF High Pass Filter You can set the Key Follow parameters for the High Pass Filter This screen is available only when you have one of the LPF HPF settings for the Type parameter in the Filter Type FLT Type screen FLTGHFF 2 Cutoff KeyFlu EL1i 34 2590 7H8x E Cutoff Set the center frequency of the Key Follow parameter LiSettings 0 255 E KeyFlw Key Follow Set the Key Follow for the HPF Cutoff This parameter varies the center frequency according to the position of the notes played on the keyboard A positive setting will raise the center frequency for higher notes and lower it for lower notes A negative setting will have the opposite effect Li Settings 200 0 200 80 FLT Sens Filter Sensitivity You can set Filter Sensitivity parameters for each Element FLTASens JEGDerth WelCutoff WelReso EL1 z234 63 7 7 E EGDepth Set the sensitivity of the Filter to note velocity A positive setting will produce large filter changes for notes played harder and a settin
224. ocity Oscillator Velocity 97 Plug in Element Pitch 97 PCH PEG Pitch Envelope Generator 98 Plug in Element EQ Equalizer 98 EQ Param EQ Parameter _ _ 98 Plug in Element Native 98 PLG NATIVE Plug in Native 98 Fe ee ee There are two edit screens for a Plug in Voice One is for general Voice settings called Plug in Common and the other is for element settings called Plug in Element There is only one element available for a Plug in Voice but you can make access to parameters in Plug in Common and Element screens which are similar to ones for a normal Voice In Plug in Voice editing you can switch between the Common and Element screens using the Knob A Plug in Common Edit Screens GEHAO her Mode Assign Poly single Common Indicator Plug in Element Edit Screens 0SCAASss ign Bank Humber HORM 61 iz8 6ndFiano Plug in Element Indicator SHIFT PAGE A gt 90 00O PART ELEMENT DATA 6 Menu Displa When you use the PAGE knob while holding down the SHIFT key you will see the following Menu Display Then use the PAGE knob to move the cursor to the desired item and release the SHIFT key to jump to the Edit screen for the selected item Cursor HTUGPremi Com GENRKGED ARPSCTL gt LFO EFF Comma r Elem 05C PCH EQ gt PLG_MATIVE SHIFT PAGE A OQ PART ELEMENT DATA 6 The PROGRAM PART keys on the S30 c
225. off off off off o Octave 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Transpose 0 Note Limit Low Note Limit High G8 Transmit Switch PB on Transmit Switch MW on Transmit Switch KnobA C on Transmit Switch Knob1 2 on Transmit Switch FC on Transmit Switch AT on Transmit Switch FS on Transmit Switch Vol on Transmit Switch Pan on Transmit Switch Bank Select Transmit Switch Program Change off Transmit Preset Volume Transmit Preset Pan Transmit Preset Bank MSB Transmit Preset Bank LSB Transmit Preset PC CS Control Number Assign ch Keyboard transmit channel p split point Details about each parameter are given on page 121 For more information about the master keyboard mode refer to page 52 in Basics Section Common Quick Edit You can set various parameters governing the sonic properties of the Layer Part The following four screens are only available when the Layer switch Page 117 for each Part is set to on OED Level Quick Edit Level OED EF Quick Edit Effect OED Filter Quick Edit Filter OED EG Quick Edit Envelope Generator QED Level Quick Edit Level You can set output level and pan parameters for each Layer Part The settings are also available in the Part Edit screens GEDBLevels Wool Pan FeyvSend ChoSend Commor izr C 63 63 E Vol Volume Set the output level of the Layer Part Li Settings 0 127 E Pan Set the stereo pan position of th
226. ompare I Function Use this to listen to the difference between the Performance with your edited settings and the same Performance prior to editing Press the EDIT COMPARE key while in Performance Edit Mode The E indicator at the top left of the screen will change to the M indicator and the EDIT COMPARE key LED will blink The Performance settings prior to editing will temporarily be reinstated for comparison purposes Compare indicator Editing will not be possible while the Compare function is enabled Press the EDIT key again to disable the Compare function and restore the settings for your edited Performance Performance Store The edited settings for the current Performance will be lost if you exit to Performance Play Mode and then select another Performance or Mode To avoid losing important data you should always use Performance Store to store your edited Performances after exiting Performance Edit Mode Details about the Performance Store procedure are given on Page 124 Details about the Edit Recall function are given on Page 123 When creating a new Performance from scratch it is useful prior to editing to clear the settings for the current Performance using the Initialize Performance function in Performance Job Mode Page 123 Common Settings for all Parts Here we explain how to edit common settings for all Parts in a Performance There are six Menus available e
227. on Bank A H Bank A H Bank A D the screen via keyboard The Drum Voices are held in separate areas of each Memory and are accessed as follows e To access the Preset Drum Memories PRE DRI1 DRS8 Press the MEMORY PRE2 key while holding down the MEMORY PRE1 key 22 e To access the User Drum Memories INT DR1 2 EXT DR1 2 Press the MEMORY EXT key while holding down the MEMORY INT key PRE1 PRE 2 INT EXT U T DRUM DRUM To access Preset Drum Voices To access User Drum Voices PRE DR1 DR8 INT DR1 2 EXT DR1 2 PRE1 and PRE2 Preset 1 and 2 are stored in internal Read Only Memory ROM and contain preset Voices which are never overwritten INT internal is stored in Random Access Memory RAM and contains the factory default Voices These can be overwritten but can be recalled from the original factory settings at any time if required EXT external is stored on a Memory Card inserted in the CARD slot If there is no Memory Card inserted and you attempt to select an EXT Voice will be displayed and no sound will be produced With a Memory Card inserted you can select and play EXT Voices PLG Voices can only be selected if a Plug in Board is installed Select a Voice Number using the DATA knob or the INC YES and DEC NO keys Turn the DATA knob clockwise or press the INC YES key to increment the Voice Number Turn it anti clockwise or press the DEC NO key to de
228. one volume pitch and other parameters Details about how to these controllers are given on Page 39 w cano a ak ee a EET ei S FOOT FOOT SWITCH CONTROLLER Powering Up Power on Procedure When you have made all the necessary connections between your synthesizer and any other devices make sure that all volume settings are turned down all the way to zero Then turn on the every device in your setup in the order of MIDI masters senders MIDI slaves receivers then audio equipment mixers amplifiers speakers etc This ensures the smooth flow of signals from the first device to the last first MIDI then audio When powering down the setup first turn down the volume for each audio devices then switch off each device in the reverse order first audio devices then MIDI When the S30 as MIDI receiver MIDI sender S30 Audio equipment first mixer then amplifier MIDI receiver Switching the 30 On N In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected electronic equipment always switch on the power of the S30 before switching on the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier Likewise always switch off the power of the S30 after switching off the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier Even when the switch is in the STANDBY position electricity is sti
229. ong Number Playback tempo E Playback Tempo LI Settings default tempo 25 300 Use Knob B and the ENTER key to select the Demo Song Number OSet the tempo if necessary The Demo Songs contain preset tempos by default When you switch to another Demo Song its preset tempo will be used You can change the playback tempo To restore the default tempo select as the tempo setting Sequence Play Mode 125 Press the PLAY STOP key to play back the selected Demo Song from the beginning Press the PLAY STOP key again to stop the Demo Song playback If you press the PLAY STOP key once again playback will resume from the current position Demo Songs will playback continuously until stopped SEQ Sequence Chain You can set up to 100 Steps in a Chain here Each Chain Step is assigned a Song file and a Performance Voices for each Part used in the Song You can play back one particular Chain Step or multiple Chain Steps end to end Chain Step Number 1 100 Performance MIDI CH Song File Sequence Track MIDI CH Part 1 i ae L s E 16 Plug in Part Chain settings can be saved to Memory Card Song File Name Performance Bank Number Chain Step Number Measure Playback tempo E Chain Step Number Change each Chain Step If you choose a Step Number here the screen for the selected Chain Step will be displayed LI Settings 00 99 You can jump to the next
230. or Pan OSC Other Oscillator Other OSC Wave Oscillator Wave Assign a Wave Normal Voice to each Drum Key Use Knob A or press a note on the keyboard to select the Drum Key and use Knob C to select the Wave Normal Voice assigned to it Tyre Woe Mem Humber CLorg OSCAWawe 3 Ke y PEEL 8610PFiGrand 1 J CS E Mem Memory This is displayed when you have selected vce Normal Voice as the Type parameter Select the Voice Memory for the Normal Voice J Settings PRE1 PRE2 INT EXT You cannot select Plug in Voices E Number Wave Number Select a Wave Normal Voice Number The Category and Name are shown to the right of the selected Wave Normal Voice Number The selection of Waves Normal Voices varies according to the Type I Settings 000 off 553 for wave 001 128 for Normal Voice Details about each Wave Normal Voice are given in the separate Data List If you choose off no Wave Normal Voice will be assigned to the Drum Key E Ctgry Category Select the Category of the Wave Normal Voice If you switch to another Category the first Wave Normal Voice in that Category will be selected L Settings Details about the Categories are given as a list on Page 65 E Type Select Wave or Normal Voice as the Type With the Number and Ctgry parameters above you can specify the waveform or Normal Voice used by the Type I Settings wave vce Normal Voice Voice Mode spow DN
231. or the INC YES and DEC NO keys to enter settings Outside the Note Limit range you can play the keyboard normally without the notes being arpegsiated Therefore you can use your left hand to play block chords used by the Arpeggiator and your right hand to play melody lines in the upper part of the keyboard Arpeggiator Range Area for Playing Melody Arp Note Low Arp Note High Combined with the OSC Limit parameter of the Element Edit screen the sound used in the lower part of the keyboard can be different from that in the upper part The Note Limit parameters in Performance Mode are different to those in Voice Mode and notes outside the set range will not sound The Arpeggiator Switch parameter Page 117 for each Part should be set to on except for the Part which you wish to use to play the melody Then if necessary use the Note Limit parameter Page 117 to restrict the keyboard range for that Part Following the example in this manual if you select Voice Program Number 098 G02 of INT Portamento is already set for this Voice Use the PORTAMENTO knob and ON OFF keys to change the portamento time and switch portamento on off Page 69 Using the Arpeggiator Hold With Arpeggiator Hold switched on the arpeggiator will continue to play back even after you have released your fingers from the notes on the keyboard The same arpeggio pattern will be played back until you press another set of notes on
232. orresponding with the selected Bank no sound will be produced To edit the Board Voices on the Plug in Board you need to use a computer and the included editor software Details about Plug in Voices and Board Voices are given on Pages 27 99 Many parameters are the same as for Normal Voices the gray items in the tree diagram Only those items that differ are explained here Details about the other parameters are given in the Normal Voice explanation on Page 64 Plug in Voices Plug in Common GEN Other General Other QED EG Quick Edit Envelope Generator t Plug in Common Controller 95 CTL Pitch Pitch Bend 95 CTL Seti Control Set 1 _ 95 CTL Set2 Control Set 2 __ 95 CTL MW Control MW Control Depth 95 CTL MW Modulation MW Modulation Depth 95 CTLAT Control AT Control Depth _ 95 93 CTL AT Modulation AT Modulation Depth 96 CTL AC Control AC Control Depth __ 96 CTL AC Modulation AC Modulation Depth 96 Plug in Common LFO Low Frequency Oscillator 96 LFO Param LFO Parameter __ 96 Plug in Element Plug in Element OSC Oscillator _ 97 OSC Assign Oscillator Assign 97 OSC Vel
233. other external MIDI device using Bulk Dump FFH Bulk Durmes Job Current Perform You must set the correct MIDI Device Number in order to execute a Bulk Dump Details are given on Page 130 124 You can store the parameter settings for up to 128 Performances to each of your synthesizer s Memories INT Internal or up to 64 Performances to Memory Card EXT External The procedure is as follows When you execute this the settings for the destination Performance will be overwritten Important data should always be backed up to computer a separate Memory Card or some other storage device Press the STORE key after editing a Performance You will see the Performance Store display PFME CPfiGrandPianol CPF Init Fe Store IIHT 126 et ScHi 62 Use Knob 1 to select the destination Performance Memory INT or EXT Use Knob 2 to select the destination Performance Number This will set the Performance Memory Number to which your Performance will be stored You can also use the DATA knob or DEC NO and INC YES keys to execute this operation When you press the ENTER key you will be prompted for confirmation PFE CPfiGrandPianoal CPr lt 4 sd Init Ferf Are you sure YES CH r Press the INC YES key to confirm The message Executing will be displayed while the Job is being processed When it has completed you will see the message Completed and you will
234. ou can switch between them easily in a live performance The following procedure explains exactly how to a about this MIDI THRU OUT IN u STAND DBY o Mibi T TOHOST SWITCH CONTROLL R LMONO PHONES DCIN Press the UTILITY key to enter Utility Mode MODE OVOICE PERFORM STORE L JL L OuTILity OcaRD Osea a PLAY OEDIT O JOB STOP I C L COMPARE Use the PAGE knob to switch to the CTRL Other System Control Other screen CTRL Other FS Sys ASSI SHIFT PAGE A DATA e 000009 PART ELEMENT Use Knob B to select 099 PC Inc Program Change Increment CTRL Other FS Sys HI9CFC Inc J SHIFT PAGE A DATA re 00000 PART ELEMENT In Voice Performance Mode the Foot Switch can now be used to switch between programs Alternatively you can assign other functions such as Arpeggio Switch On Off Sequencer Play Stop and so on Page 129 You can assign Arpeggiator ON OFF and Hold functions to Knob 1 2 Performance Mode The following is an explanation of how to do this In the example we use Internal Performance 075 E11 and assign Arpeggio Hold to Knob 1 and Arpeggio ON OFF to Knob 2 Press the UTILITY key to enter Utility Mode Use the PAGE knob to switch to the MIDI Arp screen 44 Use Knob B to assign the Control Change Number for Arpeggio ON OFF which is 90 here Similarly use Knob C and set the Control Chang
235. ounds are distorted sounds e Have the effects been set appropriately Pages 66 73 74 112 e Has the volume been set too high Pages 6 and 15 Sound is very quiet e Has the MIDI volume or MIDI expression been set too low e Has the filter cutoff frequency been set too high low Pages 67 91 110 115 The pitch is wron e Have the NoteShift and Tune parameters in the MSTR TG screen of Utility Mode been set correctly Page 127 e Have the Oct and Trnspose parameters in the MSTR Kbd screen of Utility Mode been set appropriately Page 127 e Have the pitch related parameters in PITCH menu Voice Edit been set appropriately Page 75 e Has the Micro Tuning parameter in Voice Edit Mode been set to an unconventional scale Page 66 e Has the Pitch Modulation Depth in the LFO screen Voice Edit Mode been set too high Page 86 e For Performances has the Note Shift parameter in the LYR Layer screen been set to a value other than 0 Page 118 e For Performances has the Detune parameter for each Part been set to a value other than 0 Page 118 Sound is chop ry and intermittent e Has the maximum polyphony been exceeded Page 28 Only one note sounds at a time e Has the Mode parameter in the GEN Other screen of Voice Edit Common been set to mono Page 66 e In Performance Mode has the Mode parameter in the LYR Mode screen been set to mono for each Part Page 117 146 No effects are applied e Has
236. over the pitch You can set a value in semitones of up to two octaves Li Settings 24 0 24 E Filter Set the depth of control of keyboard aftertouch over the filter cutoff frequency L Settings 64 0 63 Voice Mode spow DN CTL AT Modulation AT Modulation Depth Here you can set the depth of control that keyboard aftertouch has over the pitch filter and amplitude modulation of the Plug in Voice CTLGAT Modulation FPMod Frio E Commor 177 izr oa an E PMod Pitch Modulation Depth Set the depth of control that keyboard aftertouch has over the filter pitch modulation The larger the setting the greater the depth of control Li Settings 0 127 E FMod Filter Modulation Depth Set the depth of control that keyboard aftertouch has over the filter cutoff modulation The larger the setting the greater the depth of control Li Settings 0 127 E AMod Amplitude Modulation Depth Set the depth of control that keyboard aftertouch has over the amplitude modulation The larger the setting the greater the depth of control Li Settings 0 127 CTL AC Control AC Control Depth You can set the depth of control the Control Change messages Assignable Control have over the filter of the Plug in Voice CTLBAC Controls Source Filter Commor H4CFootCir J 4 E Source Set the MIDI Control Change number used to control the filter Li Settings 0 95 E Filter Set the depth of the f
237. owing the EFF Cho Chorus screen 113 ga See eared eae The EFF Rev and EFF Cho parameter screens are available when you select the Effect and press the ENTER key If an Insertion Effect Plug in Board has been installed you can enter the parameters for the Plug in Effect at the EFF Plg Plug in screen Use the PAGE knob to switch between screens and use the other knobs and the INC YES and DEC NO keys to set each parameter When you press the EXIT key you will be returned to the Effect Type selection screen EFFRRew Tyre Return CEHTEF Common Basement i r to Edit EXIT ENTER EFFRRevw RevTime Initbly Fevbly Basement A S Sms 5 Sms SHIFT PAGE A oe PART ELEMENT B Cc 1 2 DATA The number of Parameters and the contents of each screen will vary depending on the selected Effect Type Details are given in the Effect Type List Effect Parameter List of the separate Data List Performance Mode spow SIUDWIOJ 9 Part Settings for each Part You can edit each Part in a Performance Use Knob A to select the Part then set its parameters The following six screens are available though their contents will vary according to the Part selected e Part Mixer e Part Tone e Part Layer e Part Receive switch e Part Controller e Part Insertion Effect You can set various Voice output parameters for each Part The following two screens are available MIX Vce Mix Voice MIX Level MIX Vce
238. own I Settings 3 0 3 E Trnspose Master Transpose Transpose the pitch of the keyboard up or down in semitones This affects information transmitted via MIDI L Settings 11 11 If you transpose beyond the note range limits C 2 and G8 the notes will be wrapped over Utility Mode powW 4N E Vel Keyboard Velocity Curve Set the Velocity Curve determining how the strength of the notes played will affect the sound output _i Settings norm soft hard wide fixed norm Normal The velocity is in proportion to the strength Volume Keyboard Playing Strength soft A softer playing style increases the volume level Volume Keyboard Playing Strength hard A stronger playing style increases the volume level Volume Keyboard Playing Strength wide A softer playing style lowers the volume level and a stronger playing style increases the volume level As a result you feel a wider dynamic range Volume Keyboard Playing Strength fixed Select this curve when you want the tone generator to respond sound in a specific volume tone or the like With this setting any velocity value will be changed into a fixed one you specify with the Fixed Keyboard Fixed Velocity parameter below Volume Je nee Keyboard Playing Strength 128 E Fixed Keyboard Fixed Velocity The velocity is fixed at the Vel setting The sound output is always the same regardless of how hard or gently yo
239. p or down by up to two octaves FFM MltiHotestt L Fart il H amp Li Settings 24 0 24 Performance Mode spow SIUDWIOJ 9 You can set Performance Edit parameters These can roughly be divided into Common parameters which apply to all Parts and Part specific parameters Also there are various zone settings for Master Keyboard Mode Page 108 When you enter Performance Edit Mode you will see the following screen The actual display number of screens will vary depending on the Part selected Basically Knob A is used to select the type of parameter you wish to edit Common Part Zone the PAGE knob is used to switch between the parameter screens and Knobs B C 1 and 2 are used to enter parameter settings Alternatively you can use the DATA knob and DEC NO and INC YES keys to enter settings GEH Hames Charu a z A Cursor Common i Init Perf J SHIFT PAGE A B Cc 1 2 DATA PART E _ EMENT oS Switch between screens Enter setting Select Common Part Zone You can use Knobs A to C and Knob 1 2 while holding down the SHIFT key to move the cursor to each respective parameter The cursor can also be moved using the DATA knob or the DEC NO and INC YES keys while holding down the SHIFT key You must select the Performance you wish to edit before entering Performance Edit Mode Page 104 All parameter settings for each Performance can be stored If a multitimb
240. pecified Chain Step Use Knob B to select the Song file you wish to play back When playing back a single Song you do not need to select a Chain Step Number You can have any Chain Step screen open You need to enter Card Mode beforehand and specify the directory containing the song files you wish to play back Details about how to change directory are given in the section File Directories on Page 137 Regarding the types of files that can be played back details are given in the section SMF Standard MIDI Files on Page 136 Set the tempo if necessary Set the starting point measure for the Song if necessary Select the Performance Bank Number if necessary Press the PLAY STOP key to playback the Song from the set position or from the beginning Press the PLAY STOP key again to stop the Song playback Chained Playback Use Knob A to select the Chain Step Number of the first Song you wish to play back You need to have already specified in Card Mode the directory containing the song files you wish to play back Details about how to change directory are given in the section File Directories on Page 137 Regarding the types of files that can be played back details are given in the section SMF Standard MIDI Files on Page 136 Set the tempo if necessary Set the starting point measure for the Song if necessary Select the Performance Bank Number if
241. peggio Mode ARP PlayEF Arpeggio Play Effect Plug in Common Controller You can set Pitch Bend Wheel Modulation Wheel and other Controller parameters for the Plug in Voices in the following nine screens CTL Pitch Pitch Bend CTL Set1 Control Set 1 CTL Set2 Control Set 2 CTL MW Control MW Control Depth CTL MW Modulation MW Modulation Depth CTL AT Control AT Control Depth CTL AT Modulation AT Modulation Depth CTL AC Control AC Control Depth CTL AC Modulation AC Modulation Depth CTL Pitch Pitch Bend You can set the Pitch Bend Range and Portamento for the Plug in Voice here Portamento creates a smooth transition from the pitch of the first note played to the pitch of the next CTL Pitch Pitch Bend Portamento Time Common 374 mig 12r E Pitch Bend Set the amount in semitones by which the pitch of the note is varied when you move the Pitch Bend Wheel up down For example if you set a value of 12 the pitch will change up by up to an octave when you move the wheel up Conversely if you set a negative value the pitch falls when you move the wheel down Li Settings 24 0 24 E Portamento Switch Portamento on or off L Settings off on E Time Set the Portamento Time which is the speed of the transition in pitch from the first note to the next Li Settings 0 127 CTL Set1 Control Set 1 CTL Set2 Control Set 2 These parameters are the same as for Normal Voices Details a
242. peggio Type LW Settings see the separate Data List Sq Sequence Creates a general arpeggio phrase Mainly octave up down phrases Ph Phrase Creates more musical phrases than Sq Starting with Techno there are phrases for a wide variety of musical genres and for creating backing tracks for guitar piano and other instruments Dr Drum Pattern Creates drum pattern type phrases Phrase genres covered include rock and dance This Type is ideal for use with drum and percussion sounds Ct Control Creates tonal changes No note information is created The Key Mode parameter in Arpeggio Mode must be set to direct E Tempo Set the Arpeggio Tempo LiSettings 25 300 MIDI is displayed here and the parameter cannot be altered if MIDI sync is enabled Page 131 Voice Mode spow DN E Switch Switch the Arpeggiator on or off Settings off on E Hold Switch the Arpeggiator Hold on or off LI Settings syncoff see below off on syncoff The first time you press a key the first note of the arpeggiator pattern is played From the second and subsequent key presses the arpeggiator note that is played back will depend on the arpeggiator tempo and the timing of the arpeggio pattern For example in the case of a 1 bar arpeggio pattern if the second key press falls on the third beat of the bar the arpeggio pattern plays back from the third beat onward In other words the first key press is used to sta
243. ps Insert one side of the Plug in board the connector side into the hooks 1 as shown in the illustration Hook 1 AN When installing the optional Plug in board from when you remove the cover to when the cover is replaced securely all operations must be done with the AC power adaptor disconnected Remove the tape holding the Plug in Board cable to the plate Press down the other side until it is securely Take out the Plug in board from the anti static bag settled on the hooks 2 When installing the board the side with a connector and ICs must be on top Hook 2 Carefully plug the cable connector into the Plug in board connector until the two notches on the cable connector lock into the sockets on the board as shown in the illustration N Hook 2 Replace the Plug in board cover by fastening the eight flat head screws you removed in the step above Use a coin or a Phillips screwdriver to secure the cover 142 Removing the Plug in board from the keyboard Press down the hooks 2 in the direction as shown in the illustration and take the board out from the hooks 2 by lifting up the one side Pull out the other side of the board from the hooks 1 Pull out the cable connector from the Plug in board connector 143 Appendix xipuoddy Display Messages Message Meaning lt lt MIDI buffer full Failed to process the MIDI data because too much data
244. ps to set up for Zone 2 Turn the Knob A and select Part02 Next go to the Mix Voice MIX Vce screen using the PAGE knob and select a Voice for the bass sound Then use the PAGE knob to open the Layer Mode LYR Mode screen and set MIDI receive channel RevCh to 2 With settings made here you can now play with the bass sound using a Voice assigned to Part02 set to MIDI receive channel 2 RcvCh when you play in the key range of Zone 2 As in the same manner in steps to set up for Zone 3 Turn the Knob A and select Part03 Next go to the Mix Voice MIX Vce page using the PAGE knob and select a Voice for manual solo performance Then use the PAGE knob to open the Layer Mode LYR Mode page and set the MIDI receive channel RevCh to 3 With settings made here you can now play solo using a Voice assigned to Part03 set to MIDI receive channel 3 RevCh when you play in the key range of Zone 3 You don t need to make further settings for Zone 4 since it is not intended for an internal Part and has already been set to output performance information via the MIDI OUT connector in steps to The key range of Zone 4 matches to that of Zone 3 so that solo performance made in that range will be sent on MIDI channels 3 from Zone 3 and 4 from Zone 4 via MIDI OUT to an external MIDI device You can set additional Part settings in Performance Edit Mode If you have a t
245. q Frequency Set the center frequency Frequencies around this point are attenuated boosted by the Gain setting J Settings 100Hz 10 0kHz 112 E O Frequency Characteristic This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics Li Settings 0 1 12 0 EQ High This Equalizer covers high frequencies You can adjust the signal level at the specified frequency You can also select different Equalizer types Shapes Frey HEQEGHiJh Share E 1 BH kHz ain E Common Feak 126 12 4 E Shape Select either a Shelving or Peaking equalizer The Peaking type attenuates boosts the signal at the specified Frequency setting whereas the Shelving type attenuates boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting LW Settings shelv Shelving peak Peaking E Gain Set the Gain This attenuates or boosts frequencies around the Frequency setting Li Settings 12dB 0dB 12dB E Freq Frequency Set the center frequency Frequencies around this point are attenuated boosted by the Gain setting I Settings 500Hz 16 0kHz E O Frequency Characteristic This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics Li Settings 0 1 12 0 You can set two types of Insertion Effects plus two System Effects Reverb and Chorus The following three screens are available EFF Part EFF Rev Re
246. ral Plug in Board has been installed the parameters for its Parts will not be stored Details about how to enter Performance Edit Mode are given on Page 16 Menu Display When you use the PAGE knob while holding down the SHIFT key the following menu will be displayed Use the PAGE knob to move the cursor between items then release the SHIFT key to jump to the selected item Cursor Mise Level Com SGERMMGED ARP eC TL SMEG EFF Part l Part MIK TOH LYR ERC MKEB SHIFT PAGE DATA O O OOO PART ELEMENT Common Part Zone Edit A Performance can consist of 16 Voice Parts and a Plug in Part Page 34 The parameters common to all Parts are known as a Common Edit The Performance Edit Mode screens can be divided into the Common Edit screen and screens for editing each Part individually 106 When editing individual Parts the screens you see will vary depending on the Part selected If the synthesizer is in Master Keyboard Mode Pages 7 52 you will be able to set parameters for each Zone In Performance Edit Mode use Knob A to switch between the screens for Common Part and Zone settings Common settings GED Level ol 127 Common indicator Pan FeySernd ChoSend 63 3 Part settings Mie Leeli lol 127 Pan FeyvSernd ChoSend Farti 4 A Part indicator Zone settings HEE Transmit Zone indicator SHIFT PAGE A DO TensCh TG MIDI 1 oF oF DATA O OOO P
247. ram Number as explained in the three steps given above The LCD also displays the selected voice 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 60 Using INC YES and DEC NO Keys Press the INC YES key to select the next Voice and the DEC NO key to select the previous one DEC NO INC YES Previous Number Next Number The voice is selected by pressing just the INC YES or DEC NO key This method is useful when selecting a Voice that is located near the currently selected Voice The method can also be used to switch to the next or previous Bank For example if the current Voice is A16 Voice BO1 is selected by pressing the INC YES key Similarly if the current Voice is H01 Voice G16 is selected by pressing the DEC NO key Turn the DATA knob clockwise to increment the currently selected Voice number or anti clockwise to decrement it Decrement Number DATA Increment Number The Voice is selected directly and sequentially Just as with the INC YES and DEC NO keys this method can be used to switch to the next or previous Bank Drum Voices Selecting The procedure for selecting a Drum Voice is different to that for selecting a Normal Voice e Press the MEMORY PRE2 key while holding down the MEMORY PRE1 key or vice versa to select the Preset PRE Memory of the Drum Voice Then press PROGRAM key 1 to 8 to select Drum Voice PRE DRI1 Preset Drum 1 to DR8 Preset Drum 8 6
248. range by pressing notes on the keyboard while holding down the SHIFT key Performance Mode spow SIUDWIOJ 9 E Vel Limit Set the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range Settings 1 127 for the minimum and maximum values If you specify the maximum value first and the minimum value second for example 93 to 34 then the velocity range covered will be 1 to 34 and 93 to 127 LYR Tune Layer Tune You can set note shift and tuning parameters for each Part LYFATune 2 Hote Shift DetLune Partai 74 17 7 E NoteShift Adjust the pitch of each Part in semitones Li Settings 24 24 E Detune Offset detune the pitch of each Part by a very small amount Li Settings 12 8Hz 12 7Hz 118 Part Receive Switch Each Part can be set to receive Control Change and Program Change messages The following four screens are available RCV Sw1 Receive Switch 1 RCV Sw2 Receive Switch 2 RCV Sw3 Receive Switch 3 RCV Sw4 Receive Switch 4 RCV Sw1 Receive Switch 1 When set to on each Voice in each Part will receive Control Settings PB MW RB AT and Control Change messages The Controller parameters will vary according to the Part selected Parts 1 to 16 Drum Voice Part RCUB Swi 3 FE ral FE AT Partel ort oft or oft Plug in Part Multi Plug in Part
249. ransmission of messages for the Foot Switch Volume and Pan MEBET sx Su3 3 FS Wool Pan eonell or or ori L Settings FS Foot Switch off on Vol Volume off on Pan off on 121 Performance Mode spow SIUDWIOJ 9 MKB TxSW4 Master keyboard Transmit Switch 4 For each zone you can enable or disable the transmission of Bank Select and Program Change messages when you switch Performance Banks or Programs ME BET Sw 3 Bank PC Zonei or or L Settings Bank Bank Select off on PC Program Change off on MKB TxPreset1 Master Keyboard Transmit Preset 1 You can set each zone s initial volume and stereo pan settings when changing Performance Bank Program MK BETxPreset1 3 Wolume Pan Zonei Izr C E Vol Volume Set the output level of the zone Li Settings 0 127 This setting is not transmitted if the Vol Volume parameter of the MKB TxSw3 screen has been set to off E Pan Set the stereo pan position of the zone LI Settings L64 Left C Center R63 Right This setting is not transmitted if the Pan parameter at the MKB TxSw3 screen has been set to off MKB TxPreset2 Master Keyboard Transmit Preset 2 For each zone you can set the Bank Select and Program Change parameters transmitted when changing Bank Program in a Performance oe ee Bank HSE Bank LSB PC Zone lzy 12r 1 E BankMSB MIDI Bank Select MSB Set the Bank Select MSB transmitted when changing Bank
250. rd has been installed Set GM On and XG Reset Receive parameters This screen is only available if a Multi Part XG Plug in Board has been installed Internal Part HIDI GA HG Receives Sw Sys on layer rPart E Sw Receive Switch Select whether or not to receive GM On and XG Reset messages The XG Plug in Board will recetve GM On and XG Reset messages if you set this to on L Settings off on E InternalPart The sound for each of the synthesizer s Parts can be output in the following three ways when a GM On XG Reset message is received Whichever setting you choose the Parts of the XG Plug in Board will always be output L Settings all part All Parts of the synthesizer and the Plug in Board will be output when MIDI messages are received layer part Parts which have their Layer Switch parameters set to on and all XG Plug in Board Parts will be output when MIDI messages are received all off No Parts of the synthesizer will be output but all XG Plug in Board Parts will be output when MIDI messages are received By default the Sw parameter is set to on and the InternalPart parameter is set to all off If you play a song file containing a GM On message the XG Plug in Board will be used to play back the song M EQ Voice Master Equalizer You can assign any of five different Equalizer bands in Voice Mode The following five screens are available M EO Low M EQ LowMid Low
251. re given on Page 69 The Elem SW parameter is only available for Normal Voices CTL MW Control MW Control Depth Here you can set the depth of control the Modulation Wheel has over the filter CTLEMW Control Filter Commor d4 95 E Filter Set the depth of control of the Modulation Wheel over the filter cutoff frequency L Settings 64 0 63 CTL MW Modulation MW Modulation Depth Here you can set the depth of control the Modulation Wheel has over the pitch filter and amplitude modulation of the Plug in Voice CTLEMW Modulation PMod Fhtod Ahad Commor izr ler Lif E PMod Pitch Modulation Depth Set the depth of control the Modulation Wheel has over the pitch modulation The larger the setting the greater the depth of control Li Settings 0 127 E FMod Filter Modulation Depth Set the depth of control the Modulation Wheel has over the filter cutoff modulation The larger the setting the greater the depth of control Li Settings 0 127 E AMod Amplitude Modulation Depth Set the depth of control the Modulation Wheel has over the amplitude modulation The larger the setting the greater the depth of control Li Settings 0 127 CTL AT Control AT Control Depth Here you can set the depth of control keyboard aftertouch has over the pitch and filter of the Plug in Voice CTLGAT Controls Pitch Filter Commor 24 d E Pitch Set the depth of control of keyboard aftertouch
252. rol Set 1 _ 69 CTL Set2 Control Set 2 _ 69 m CTL Set3 Control Set 3 69 CTL Set4 Control Set 4 _ 69 CTL Set5 Control Set 5 69 CTL Set6 Control Set 6 69 Common LFO Low Frequency Oscillator ___ 70 LFO Wave ___HTHKTVT __ 70 LFO Fade __HRHHT __ 72 LFO Dest1 LFO Destination 1 __ 72 LFO Dest2 LFO Destination 2 _ 72 Common Effect _ 73 EFF InsEF Insertion Effect ____ 73 EFF EF 1 Insertion Effect 1 __ 73 EFF EF2 Insertion Effect 2 ___ 73 EFF Rev Reverb 74 EFF Cho Chorus _ __ 74 Element Element OSC Oscillator 74 m OSC Wave Oscillator Wave _ __ 74 OSC Out Oscillator Out __ 74 OSC Pan Oscillator Pan __ 75 OSC Limit Oscillator Limit
253. rouble possibly associated with these settings such as no sound from a specific Part confirm any Part settings related to volume etc Refer to page 115 for more information about Part settings Before exiting Performance Edit Mode store above settings in a Performance For storing a Performance refer to page 124 In Performance Play Mode recall the Performance you have just stored Simply pressing the MASTER KEYBOARD key activates or deactivates the 4 Zone configuration you made above Layer The illustration below shows an example of a Layer configuration Layer refers to two separate Parts with a overlapped key range enabling to play unison with these Parts The following example is to play unison with Voices selected for Part 1 and Plug in Part You can make this configuration in the following steps 35 Layer Upper Part 1 Plug in Part Voice Plug in Voice Mi Before you set up a Layer configuration in the following procedure edit and prepare necessary Voices for layers in associated Edit Modes Plug in Voices are available only when you attach an optional Plug in Board page 98 Press the PERFORM key followed by the EDIT key each LED will light to enter Performance Edit Mode Then press the MASTER KEYBOARD key to activate Master Keyboard Mode its LED will light Select Common using the Knob A then open the General Master Keyboard GEN M Kbd screen using the PAGE knob We
254. rpeggio plays back If the Arpeggio Category is set to Ct you will not hear any sounds unless you select direct here With the sort and thru settings the order in which notes are played back will depend on the Arpeggio sequence data E Vel Mode Velocity Mode Set the playback velocity of the Arpeggio There are 2 modes L Settings original Preset velocities are used in the Arpeggio sequence thru Velocities of the notes you play are used in the Arpeggio sequence ARP PlayEF Arpeggio Play Effects You can set Play Effects for the Arpeggio Play Effects can be used to temporarily adjust the timing and velocity of MIDI notes thus affecting the groove of the Arpeggio pattern AFFF 1 ayEF gt Unit llel Gate C i234 S0 200z a5 Se E Unit Adjust the Arpeggio playback time For example if you set a value of 200 the playback time will be doubled and the tempo halved Alternatively if you set a value of 50 the playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled Normal playback time is 100 Settings 50 66 75 100 133 150 200 E Vel Velocity Set the Velocity offset value the strength at which the keyboard is played This determines how the original Velocities are increased or decreased during Arpeggio playback A setting of 100 means the original values are used Settings below 100 will reduce the velocity of the Arpeggio notes whereas settings above 100 will increase the ve
255. rt the arpeggio pattern and thereafter you can use the key to mute or un mute the pattern by respectively holding it down or releasing it This is particularly useful when the arpeggiator is being used to generate drum patterns Details about this are given on Page 38 io Note Limit ARP Limit Arpe ARPELimits Hote Limit C 1234 E 65 C 2 E Note Limit Set the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggiator s note range I Settings C 2 G8 lowest and highest set separately If you specify the highest note first and the lowest note second for example C5 to C4 then the note range covered will be C 2 to C4 and C5 to G8 You can set the lowest and highest notes in the range by pressing notes on the keyboard while holding down the SHIFT key ARP Mode Arpeggio Mode These parameters control the way in which notes are played back by the Arpeggiator Key Mode Wel Mode sort ru HRPEMode 3 C 1234 E Key Mode Set how the Arpeggio is played back when keys on the keyboard are pressed There are 3 modes L Settings sort Plays back notes in ascending order from the lowest key pressed to the highest thru Plays back notes in the order in which the keys are pressed direct Plays back the notes exactly as you play them If changes to Voice parameters such as Pan or Cutoff frequency are included in the Arpeggio sequence data they will be applied and reproduced whenever the A
256. rum Voices together and the five Drum Key screens When you select a Drum Voice and enter Voice Edit Mode you will see the Drum Voice Edit screen at which you were previously editing An overview of the Drum Voices is given on Page 32 Most parameters have already been explained for Normal Voices The gray items in the tree diagram Those parameters not previously covered are explained here Details about the functions common to both Drum Voices and Normal Voices are given in the section Normal Voices Page 64 Voice Edit Drum Drum Common QED EG Quick Edit Envelope Generator Drum Key Drum Key OSC Oscillator _ 89 OSC Wave Oscillator Wave 89 OSC Out Oscillator Out 90 OSC Pan Oscillator Pan _ 90 OSC Other Oscillator Other 90 Voice Mode spow DN Drum Key Pitch 91 PCH Tune Pitch Tune __ 91 Drum Key Filter 91 FLT Cutoff Filter Cutoff 91 Drum Key Amplitude _ 91 AMP AEG Amplitude Envelope Generator 92 AMP VelSens Amplitude Velocity Sensitivity 92 rum Key EQ Equalizer __ 86 EQ Type EQ Type 86 EQ Param EQ Parameter 86 Drum Common Edit and Drum Key Edit Each Drum Voice consists of multiple Waves or Normal Voices assigned to notes across the keyboard CO
257. ry Number Bank NUmber sciscsssseverciserasernvoernre 102 Ferlormance AG eseina a rrasa EE 103 Fret omnes Vay Mode 1 senini a 102 Periormance Program SCLECIOM ecsrsriirrrirtir iriri iranere 104 Fertormance DIOTE es aene orne ERa 107 124 IP WE TN A 24 34 TETE D a N 124 AIE E o OROI ATEA OSE IEA A OAT VONT ENT 123 PENE RoC pirrer iieri aE E 123 PE E AOAR 123 PEM Play Perionnanice Play lamama 102 PE i 2 EN E E te ereenee neers 8 Bee Ce arr acoder andes eee ae 6 PUGH Envelope Generator Sets vi viscsccivakewsvcxvdendenciesancsitabvenscevsmneare 71 93 Face sews P O ENIA E E IENE AA EA ETETE TE ET 16 PLG Plug in if a Plug in Board has been installed 0 ccccceeee 133 PLG MODI Tor a MDI eaen e aa 133 PLO NATIVE Pnn NORTE ri RN 98 TOG een T ue 0 ss asascetecrnsaresnsionracicenianvanieeeninaaarnen 133 Pie Comon AT Gites ae weanieineae wa 94 te a Common Controller srrsrmireiihiitrnrrirt inini EE N 95 Toran One O a E 97 Piagam Common General natin aeanadenda arsenate ia n a 94 Plug in Common LFO Low Frequency Oscillator cccccccsescesesees 96 Popin Coninon Oiek To ceserictocca eaters ne r aE NETERA 94 Plug in Element EQ Equalizer isrsirsivisresssrsrreviarssvoreinssnssssrsresrorossvonsss 98 ee 1 O O EE IA A IENE EE ONA 98 Flugin Element OSC Oscillator visa cessssrsevomieesieanesissiviciavveccieneveneee 97 Pao a ement r e ae e 97 P Er 93 eraa h AAEN E VA AEE AE E N ET E AEE 9 Te E adie eeeuene eee ee 14 PROGRAM PART 1 to
258. ry Set job You will see the Completed message displayed after the job has completed You can cancel a job while it is being executed by pressing the DEC NO key Press the EXIT key to return to Utility Mode Card Mode In Card Mode you can use Memory Card a SmartMedia card available at a consumer electronics shop etc to save or load data from to the instrument or perform other data exchange operations between memories on the instrument and the Card Using the included Card Filer software you can use a computer to manage data on Memory Card You can also use it to exchange data between the computer and Memory Card Handling the Memory Card SmartMedia Be sure to handle Memory Cards with care Follow the important precautions below SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation E Compatible Memory Card Type 3 3V 3V Memory Cards can be used 5V type Memory Cards are not compatible with this instrument E Memory Capacity There are five types of Memory Cards 2MB 4MB 8MB 16MB 32MB A Memory Card with the memory capacity exceeding 32MB can also be used if it conforms to the standards of SSFDC Solid State Memory Card Card another name of SmartMedia Forum E Inserting Removing Memory Cards e To insert a Memory Card Hold the Memory Card so that the connector section gold of the Memory Card is facing downward and forward towards the Memory Card slot Carefully insert the Memory Card into
259. s 64 0 63 E Time Segment Set the velocity sensitivity of the PEG s Time parameters Use Knob 2 to select the Segment then use Knob 1 to set its Time parameter Positive Time settings will play back the specified Segment faster and negative values will play it back slower J Settings Time 64 0 63 I Settings Segment attack Affects the Hold Time Attack Time Decay 1 Time all Affects all PEG Time parameters PEG Time You can set various Time parameters for the Pitch Envelope Generator PEG Combined with the PEG Level and PEG Release settings these can be used control the change in sound from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released Page 77 You can set different values for each Element Decad 127 PEGET ime EL1i234 Ler Hold Attack Decal 177 12r 76 E Hold Hold Time Set the Hold Time Li Settings 0 127 E Attack Attack Time Set the Attack Time Li Settings 0 127 E Decay1 Decay 1 Time Set the Decay 1 Time Li Settings 0 127 E Decay2 Decay 2 Time Set the Decay 2 Time Li Settings 0 127 PEG Level You can set various Level parameters for the Pitch Envelope Generator PEG Combined with the PEG Time and PEG Release settings these can be used control the change in sound from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released Page 77 You can set different values for each Element PEGBLeyvel 3 Hold Atta
260. s 0 127 E Decay2 Decay 2 Time Set the Decay 2 Time If you select hold the level amplitude will be held until you release the note Li Settings 0 126 hold AMP VelSens Amplitude Velocity Sensitivity You can define how the amplitude output level varies according to the velocity of the received notes AMPRWe Serns i Lengel kes C 3 65 E Level Set the velocity sensitivity of the Amplitude Envelope Generator s output level Positive settings will cause the output level to rise the harder you play the keyboard and conversely negative values will cause it to fall L Settings 64 0 63 92 a ete each N Ae The Amplitude Envelope Generator has three Time parameters and one Level parameter These govern the transitions between output levels for the duration of a note The Attack Time is the time taken for the sound to reach its peak output level from the moment a note is played on the keyboard The Decay 1 2 Time and the Decay 1 Level parameters are used to set the behavior of the remainder between the sound s peak output level and the point at which it fades to zero Furthermore you can set these parameters to be sensitive to note velocity The Attack Level is fixed at its maximum value Level Attack Decay1 Level Level a a Attack Decay1 Decay2 Time Time Time Key on Decay2 hold Level Attack Decay1 Level Level E gt a a Attack Decay1 Decay2 Time Time T
261. s ssicchswssnansaadieehninicaunsacseanseescataodes 18 Pe a E ie EA EE EE A A E ETE 19 Dimo Flyback sscniceninnnn 21 Voices and Performances esssssseseecsescsesescees 22 PES a OO a 22 Payin Pe anai 24 An Overview of the S30 ccsccsccscescsccscesees 26 Controller SECHNON sisinta nn i 26 Seguencer SECON cicciserreceientinisnerercverseriewecenssninies 26 Tone Uoneralor BCCI pennie efi PO SOD sanciewardasiserviareiedinasineenswabatsoiciniokin 29 A DOME the Modos ccciieviccnsircrinniimnennce 30 We E an apices 31 An Overview of Voices WAVES ccccsscccesesneeees a2 Na atte enn 33 Poroa Ces sccsccckcascssesesacceasraateaiericeieoienemens 34 Ideal Tor Playing Live sssssssssssssscssssssscsssesssesee 35 Toone OE aE 36 2 Using COnMOlETS sacs 38 WS Ena aa 45 EUR cs rca E AE 50 Using as a Master Keyboard Performance Mode wascicisrisscvscescsinnsiceesnevcunerte 52 Using as a Multitimbral Tone Generator Perliormonce Mode serirnnciienaianni 57 Vote Mod caine 59 a a a IEIET EEEE EAE E E 59 in AEAN EP NOREA OE EEA 63 VOET D D OO sri ails 100 VCE OTE sne 101 Performance Mod dsiisacacinannicaiinsnnic 102 Por amonen Py ain 102 Paoro EdE aia 106 Peri or miance TOP MOOC sosca 123 Pom ra tS Oli as 124 Sequence Play Mode ssisscsssasessssssvecsssnsrsacccieiens 125 Oe Ai 127 URH JOR MOUE sensus 134 Cat ModE saiid 135 Appendix About the Plug in Boards Optional 141 Display MOCSSAGER seccdseceviivecacce
262. s value O5CE0ut Level Delay InsEF EL1234 J6 k B ins SHIFT PAGE A DATA m OOOO PART ELEMENT INC YES and DEC NO Keys You can use the INC YES key to increment a parameter setting by one step or the DEC NO key to decrement it If you hold down either key the value is continuously changed DEC NO INC YES You can also use these keys to answer YES or NO when a confirmation message is displayed Moving the Cursor By pressing the INC YES or DEC NO key while holding down the SHIFT key you can move the cursor between parameters on the screen without affecting their values Ec ies uti Level Delas InsEF 4 k 36 5 ins SHIFT PAGE A DATA 8 0000 DEC NO INC YES DATA Knob Use this knob to change the value of the parameter at which the cursor is positioned Turn the knob clockwise to increment the value one click step at a time or turn it anti clockwise decrement it eo bf Wo T ti Lewel Delay ita k 36 5 ne SHIFT PAGE DATA 58 PART ELEMENT Moving the Cursor Turn the DATA knob clockwise or anti clockwise while holding down the SHIFT key to move the cursor to a parameter in the screen without affecting its value O5CE0ut Level Delay aa ELi234 k 36 5 ne2 SHIFT PAGE DATA 2960666 PART ELEMENT ENTER Ke Use this key to apply a setting when it is blinking for example The ENTER key is also used wh
263. scastactsecevaxacosvadees 144 Troubleshooting sssscsescseseseseseseseseseseseseseses 145 SPee a nine 148 oie arpa 149 Voice Mode Performance Mode Sequence Play Mode Utility Mode Card Mode Appendix The Controls amp Connectors CONTROL SLIDER Muf C SYNTHESIZER lar Synthesis Plug i 1 PITCH bend wheel Page 38 Controls the pitch bend effect You can also assign other functions to this controller 2 MODULATION wheel Page 38 Controls the modulation effect You can also assign other parameters functions to this controller 3 VOLUME Slider Page 15 Adjusts the master volume Move the slider upwards to raise the output level from the OUTPUT L R jacks and the PHONES jack 4 Control Sliders Page 56 In Master Keyboard Mode the sliders can be used to control various functions assigned to them as Control Change messages Each slider controls each of four Zones 5 SHIFT key Page 18 In Voice or Performance Play Mode a screen for viewing or setting the Octave parameter and the MIDI Transmit channel Page 18 is shown when you press the SHIFT key In any of the Edit Modes when pressing this key while turning the PAGE knob a menu screen is displayed and you l I I I l I can quickly switch between Edit Mode screens Page 18 If while holding this key you turn one of Knobs A C H 2 DATA knob or press either INC YES or DEC NO k
264. scisionntareninneteraeedines 65 85 108 GEN Other General Other 0 eee ceeeccccessecesssceesscecessseceseeeesees 66 94 H TA eer Sl eea a 8 l Mime do E E EEE S A A A EAER T EAE EN ETE 7 19 61 TT E OaE TE 50 73 J TE BIE IESEAN AAEE N N O E T PATEA A E ARA A 17 K E e E EE E E E A E E E E 60 103 Knobs A IBL ICL D and 2 sanssssiassveeieceererantiovesnicendnnnes 6 19 39 150 L Taror Waster kao board Mode ecirar ote ayer Tear oane Mere in 117 yO Cyst Danay eee 6 E D A AE 86 LFO Desti LTO Destination 1 uineinnonesasrsnia n 72 LOD C L O DO ri 72 DD E EEEE OEE EIEE A E ETE E E A A la LFO Param LTO Parameter oenen N 96 ETE E a NA E EAE A A A AE AA A ETAT 70 85 at AA 138 LYR Limit ee LIMIT snotra EE 117 AR Moda Layer Modo eerca 117 eTe orar T a 118 M WEO Voice Manter Poudien aorensin nni 131 WLEO High Master EO Figh siciacccesteneorea icra ooeesnenieeens 192 M EQ HighMid Master EO High Middle Range 132 MEO Lon et LON lrs psioecericceictaciedicngieeees 132 M EQ LowMid Master EQ Low Middle Range esccneercerceree 132 M EQ Mid Master EQ Middle Range focscisccscaccosacscpessxessccsecssancossacpucse 132 Master keyboard arreirar erth arininn a nE AAEE De daoL her Master Keyboard lone Generator Mode asiwsiencarnnemnninies 106 DE KEYBOARD Key crnca 7 Pl i E N 28 i Te ae es sa hiean E ERR T Memory Performance Program NUM Of cincserscnacscenvsneaneanetoncesseeceneseres 102 Memory voice Frog Sieh ci
265. scnscsonancosssnvaneenseavedennateoveastansnecanceoats 111 EE a e I AE A E T E eee E 65 110 Common LFO Low Frequency Oscillator sivcissccisscatanauiierinwcratiavesancacse 7O Gan kE e D AEA N A E AT 66 109 Common Farr Lone DO serap Er E 106 Connecine ControlleTSieierpeincskisnn n 13 Connecting Txiori MIDI Equipe OG sarissa 11 Connection to a MOO esri eE ened nneaneeen 10 Connccing to a Personal Come os inccioiscansaetessetasemnuotilanesdcaheineaniianads 12 Connecting to External Audio guint es nscninn aa 9 E ERE T EAN A RRR 9 CO a E A E toneennsaser 40 149 Control Sets and External MIDI Control vccisccccsccccctcrcsscuseccsacesensbeassicdued 41 Controller SeCHOn isses renin 26 38 Controlling Parameters by Foot Controllers acusususnceenennennnis 43 CONTROL SLIDER aca eerste teases 6 39 56 CTLAC Control AC Control Depth ssisririiiorisiirinin ni a 96 CTL AC Control AC Control Depth Multi Plug in Parts only 120 CILAC WG Eo aionativnnxetesvanecavxarnadacvsensicoisesetearciucrseentideseveevctuussreevesi 96 CTL AC Modulation AC Modulation Depth Multi Plug in Parts only 120 CTL Assisa 1 Controller Assign 1 ivcinviasiesvercsidscnvienianvinaedes mi CTL Assipo2 Controller Aes 2j iioscccasaiyscsnsecscancateeweiemonuieansaass 111 OTLAT Conca LAT Cone Deol reintra 95 CTL AT Control AT Control Depth Multi Plug in Parts only 120 ig AA Te rE 1 a AEA II EAA orate 96 CTL AT Modulation AT Modulation Depth Multi Plug
266. ses The S30 has special settings in Performance Mode so that you can use the instrument as MIDI master keyboard You can activate the function enable those special settings when you press the MASTER KEYBOARD key on the panel its LED will light Now your instrument can send performance on the keyboard to an external tone generator as well as the internal tone generator according to the master keyboard settings in Performance Mode If you divide the keyboard into several up to four key ranges and assign separate MIDI transmit channels the keyboard can control multiple parts channels from the internal tone generator and external MIDI devices of those channels at the same time There are three Master Keyboard Modes how to make key ranges available Split 4 Zones and Layer You can learn these Master Keyboard Modes and their functional differences in the following examples The illustration below shows an example of a Split configuration Split is a typical setting to divide a keyboard into two key ranges lower and upper by splitting at a specific key note split point The following example is to split the keyboard at C3 note enabling the lower range for automatic performance with Arpeggiator and the upper range for manual solo performance You can make this configuration in the following steps Split point Lower C3 Manual play Performance by Arpeggiator Edit and prepare Voices for Arpeggiator and manual
267. set above BP4 will become the BP4 Level You can set Amplitude parameters to affect the output level of each Element The following seven screens are available AEG VelSens AEG Velocity Sensitivity AEG Time AEG Level AEG Release AMP KeyFlw AMP Key Follow AMP Scale AMP Scale Break Point AMP Scale AMP Scale Offset AEG VelSens AEG Velocity Sensitivity You can set the sensitivity of the Amplitude Envelope Generator AEG to note velocity AEGEWel Sens Lengel Timne Se oment EL1 34 7 635 attack E Level Set the sensitivity of the AEG s Level its effectiveness to note velocity A positive setting will cause larger output level changes for notes played harder and smaller changes for notes played more softly A negative setting will have the opposite effect Li Settings 64 0 63 E Time Segment Set the velocity sensitivity of the AEG s Time parameters Use Knob 2 to select the Segment then use Knob 1 to set its Time parameter Positive Time settings will play back the specified Segment faster and negative values will play it back slower J Settings Time 64 0 63 I Settings Segment attack Affects the Hold Time Attack Time Decay 1 Time all Affects all AEG Time parameters AEG Time You can set various Time parameters for the Amplitude Envelope Generator AEG Combined with the AEG Level and AEG Release settings these can be used control the change in output level from the mom
268. signal around the Cutoff frequency This is a useful way of adding further character to the sound Li Settings 64 0 63 QED EG Quick Edit Envelope Generator These four parameters control the change in the output level of a Voice over the time that a note is played WEDBEGS Attack Decay Sustain Release C 1234 63 63 63 6 Level Release Attack Decay Time Time Time Key on Key off E Attack Set the transition time from the moment a key on the keyboard is pressed to the point at which the level of the Voice reaches its peak Li Settings 64 0 63 E Decay Set the transition time from the point at which the level of the Voice reaches its peak to the point at which it levels off I Settings 64 0 63 67 E Sustain Set the level of the Voice maintained while the note on the keyboard is being held down L Settings 64 0 63 E Release Set the transition time from the point at which the note on the keyboard is released to the point at which the level of the Voice reaches zero Li Settings 64 O 63 Common Arpeggio The following four parameters control the behavior of the Arpeggiator ARP Type Arpeggio Type ARP Limit Arpeggio Note Limit ARP Mode Arpeggio Mode ARP PlayEF Arpeggio Play Effect ARP Type Arpeggio Type These are the basic parameters of the Arpeggiator Hold ori ARPETsFe Tyrfe Teneo Switch C i234 UrOctiisa 12 H E Type Set the Ar
269. sing If you switch off the power to your synthesizer while this message is displayed you risk corrupting your data Press the PERFORM key to exit Performance Job Mode and return to Performance Play Mode 123 You can reset initialize all parameters of a Performance to their default settings You can also selectively initialize certain parameters such as Common settings settings for each Part and so on Note that this is not the same as editing an existing Performance Instead it is useful when building a completely new Performance from scratch PFA Initialize Job Current Perform E Select type of parameter to Initialize Use Knob B the DATA knob or the DEC NO and INC YES keys to select the parameter to be initialized T Settings Current Perform Current Common Common Data Data common to all Layer Parts Current Part01 to Part16 Current PartPL Plug in Part Zonel to Zone4 If you are editing a Performance but you do not store it before switching to another Performance the edits you have made will be cleared In such a situation you can use the Recall function to reinstate the edits for the Performance PFA Edit Fecall3 Job You can copy each Part s parameters and Effects parameters from any Performance to the Performance you are editing This is useful if you are creating a Performance and wish to use some parameter settings from another Performance This function is not used for copying whol
270. sizer MIDI OUT p MIDI keyboard or synthesizer MIDI OUT MIDI IN External MIDI sequencer Controlling Another MIDI Device via MIDI THRU External MIDI sequencer External MIDI synthesizer 0 MIDI OUT MIDIIN _ HOST SELECT i a With the above MIDI connections you can send MIDI data from the MIDI OUT connector while MIDI data from the external sequencer can be sent to an external MIDI synthesizer via the MIDI THRU jack The MIDI cable should be no greater than 15 meters in length and there should be no more than three devices in a MIDI chain chained in series via each unit s MIDI THRU To connect more units use a MIDI Thru Box for parallel connections You may encounter errors if the MIDI cables are too long or if too many devices are chained together via their MIDI THRU connectors Connecting to a Personal Computer When a computer is connected it can be used to control the synthesizer and to transfer synthesizer data to from computer via MIDI With the included Voice Editor program for instance you can edit the synthesizer s Voices Using another program Card Filer you can transfer files between the computer and the Memory Card inserted in the synthesizer s CARD slot There are two ways to connect your synthesizer to a computer External MIDI synthesizer S30 1 Serial connection t
271. spla The LCD will display the following in Voice Play Mode Voice Play Mode consists of 2 screens and the PAGE knob can be used to switch to the Voice Search screen The contents of each screen are as follows See page 62 for details about the Voice search screen Details about how to enter Voice Play Mode are given on Page 16 Voice Play Mode 1 2 3 UCE Flat PRE1 128 H16 PPE GrandFP iano EW Low EW Mid EW H1 Lutotrt Rew ime A 4 c 1 2 SHIFT PAGE 59 PART ELEMENT DATA 2nd Screen Voice Search WCE Sech PREL 128 H16i CPF GrandPianad empora Humber Ctar Search SHIFT PAGE A 5 PART ELEMENT DATA 1 Screen Title This shows that you are currently in Voice Play Mode 2 Voice Memory Number Bank Number Display Shows the Memory Voice Program Number 001 to 128 or Bank A to H Program Number 1 to 16 For example in the display shown above PRE1 128 H16 means that the Memory is Preset 1 the voice Program Number is 128 the Bank is H and the Program Number within the Bank is 16 59 Memory Voice Program Number PRE1 refers to Preset 1 PRE2 to Preset 2 PRE to Preset Drums INT to Internal EXT to External and PLG to Plug in Board All voice Program Numbers within each memory fall in the range 001 to 128 Drum Voices are DR1 to DRS Details about Voice Memories are given on Page 31 Bank Program Number Voice Program Numbers 001 to 128 correspond with
272. st in the separate Data List Effects in Voice Mode In Voice Mode you can set up the effect type and its value for each Effect Unit Reverb Chorus and Insertion Effects and store them with each Voice Furthermore you can determine that each Element connects or bypasses the Insertion Effect Units When you connect an Element to Insertion Effects you can also specify the connecting way of two Units series or parallel as illustrated below The combined signal from all Voice Elements after application of the Insertion Effects is sent to the Reverb and Chorus System Effect Units When you want to use Plug in Voices from a Plug in Board attached you can also set up a dedicated Insertion Effect Unit for each Plug in Voice In this case a Plug in Voice signals processed with the Insertion Effect Unit will be then routed to Reverb and Chorus Units Connection EP1 EP2 1 Hoa 2 gt 1 2 S J EP1 gt EP2 EP2 gt EP1 Insertion Effects Plug in Voice THRU Insertion Effects Effects in Performance Mode In Performance Mode you can use an Insertion Effects setting borrowed from ones respectively stored with Voices Parts For a Plug in Part you can select and use an Insertion Effect setting borrowed from ones respectively stored with Plug in Voices For Reverb and Chorus you can create new settings dedicated for an entire Performan
273. t either a Shelving or Peaking equalizer The Peaking type attenuates boosts the signal at the specified Frequency setting whereas the Shelving type attenuates boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting LW Settings shelv Shelving peak Peaking shelv Shelving EQLow EQLow Freq Freq2 Frequency peak Peaking Nae Freq Performance Mode spow SIUDWIOJ 9 E Gain Set the Gain This attenuates or boosts frequencies around the Frequency setting Li Settings 12dB 0dB 4 12dB E Freq Frequency Set the center frequency Frequencies around this point are attenuated boosted by the Gain setting Li Settings 32Hz 2 0kHz E QO Frequency Characteristic This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics Li Settings 0 1 12 0 0 1 12 0 Frequency Freq EQ LowMid Low Middle Range EQ Mid Middle Range EQ HighMid High Middle Range These Equalizers cover low to middle middle and high to middle frequency ranges They can be used to adjust the signal level around the specified frequency Low Mid MEGELowhid gt Gain Frey Commor 127dE 18Hz 13 4 Mid MEGEM1id gt Gain Frey Commor 127dE 1HBH 17 4 High Mid MEGEH1iShMids Commor Gain Frey E 126 1HBHz iz B E Gain Set the Gain This attenuates or boosts frequencies around the Frequency setting Li Settings 12dB 0dB 12dB E Fre
274. t recommended by Yamaha only Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or over heating Before cleaning the instrument always remove the electric plug from the out let Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the instrument or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radi ators and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects on it or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over it When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet always hold the plug itself and not the cord Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple con nector Doing so can result in lower sound quality or possibly cause over heating in the outlet Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument or during elec trical storms Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components turn off the power for all components Before turning the power on or off for all compo nents set all volume levels to minimum Also be sure to set the volumes of all components at
275. t this parameter shown as eee E RcvNtOff Receive Note Off Select whether MIDI Note Off messages are received by each Drum Key L Settings off on This parameter depends on the Type of Drum Key Wave chosen in the OSC Wave screen E AltGrp Alternate Group Set the Alternate Group to which the Wave is assigned In a real drum kit some drum sounds cannot physically be played simultaneously such as open and closed hi hats You can prevent Waves from playing back simultaneously by assigning them to the same Alternate Group Up to 127 Alternate Groups can be defined You can also select off here if you wish to allow the simultaneous playback of sounds Ll Settings off 1 127 Drum Key Pitch Set the pitch of each Drum Key The tunings and Pitch EG parameters can be set for each Drum Key PCH Tune Pitch Tune PCH Tune Coarse Fine Wel Sens Key C 3 65 E Coarse Adjust the pitch of each Drum Key Wave or Normal Voice in semitones Li Settings 48 48 For a Normal Voice this parameter adjusts the position of its note not its pitch relative to note C3 For example let s assume the original Voice consists of a two Element piano like sound up to note C3 and a two Element string like sound from note C 3 upwards Adjusting this Coarse setting by 1 would not change the pitch of the piano like sound to C 3 Instead note C 3 of the original Voice i e the string like sound would be used E Fin
276. ted to your synthesizer correctly Page 12 After pressing the PERFORM key press the EDIT key the respective LEDs will light You are now in Performance Edit Mode Before entering Performance Edit Mode you need to select a Performance for editing Also make sure that the MASTER KEYBOARD key LED is not lit Use Knob A to select Parts Here you can select Part 2 for the piano Part 3 for bass and Part 10 for drums First we will select Part 02 Use the PAGE knob to switch to the MIX Vce Mix Voice screen then specify the Voice to be used as the piano Part MIeBWces Mem rE Ctar Search Partaz BI CPF GrandPianad ord Humbe PRE1 128 H1 57 Using as a Multitimbral Tone Generator Performance Mode O Next use the PAGE knob to switch to the Mix Level screen then set the volume for the piano Part as well as if necessary its pan position chorus and reverb Send levels Details are given on Page 115 Ocontinue using the PAGE knob and switch to the LYR Mode Layer Mode screen Set the Mode parameter to poly polyphonic the Layer parameter to off and the RcvCh parameter MIDI receive channel to 2 LYREMode gt Mode Are Laver RovCh Parte Fol or oft 2 For Parts that do not require polyphony the Mode parameter can be set to mono monophonic By following steps to above when you play back a song file in the sequencer the piano track is transmitted through MIDI c
277. th PLG150 VL other external device s disconnect the device s PLG150 Dx Turn over the keyboard so you can have direct access to BEd S 27 for detailed explanati f h board EE ROW ion ep nrere ree ee es the underside To protect the Knobs and Wheels place BLT PLG100 VH cannot be used the keyboard so the four corners are supported by BEGG Although the PLG100 VL and PLG100 DX can also be installed something that provides sufficient support like magazines some of the functions are not available or cushions Precautions When Installing the Optional Boards 4 Remember the following precautions and install the Plug in a RCH al boards properly by following the steps as written Handle the Plug in boards with care Dropping or subjecting the Plug in board to any kind of shock may cause damage or result in a malfunction e Be careful of static electricity There are times when static lt is electricity affects the IC chips on the Plug in board aT ae Before you lift the optional Plug in board to reduce the i l AMI possibility of static electricity touch the metal parts other S j T TU than the painted area or a ground wire on the devices that are grounded E 85 oo EREE oo bb A OOOO BE oOoooooo0no oOooooooo0 Place the supports at all four corners e Do not touch the exposed metal parts in the circuit board Pee evening TERNAS sane Touching these parts may result in a faulty contact
278. the Modulation Wheel is used Li Settings 0 127 119 Performance Mode spow SIUDWIOJ 9 E FMod Filter Modulation Depth Set the amount by which the filter Cutoff frequency changes when the Modulation Wheel is used Li Settings 0 127 E AMod Amplitude Modulation Depth Set the amount by which the amplitude modulation changes when the Modulation Wheel is used Li Settings 0 127 CTL AT Control AT Control Depth Multi Plug in Parts only Keyboard aftertouch can be used to control the pitch filter amplitude parameters for each Multi Plug in Part 17 to 32 Ame CTLGAT Control tir 63 Pitch Filter Par 24 63 E Pitch Set the amount in semitones by which the pitch changes when aftertouch is applied L Settings 24 24 E Filter Set the amount by which the filter Cutoff frequency changes when aftertouch is applied Li Settings 64 63 E Amp Set the amount by which the output level amplitude changes when aftertouch is applied Li Settings 64 63 CTL AT Modulation AT Modulation Depth Multi Plug in Parts only Keyboard aftertouch can be used to control the amount of pitch filter amplitude modulation applied to each Multi Plug in Part 17 to 32 CTLGAT Modulation PMod FM Parti 12r 1 E PMod Pitch Modulation Depth Set the amount by which the pitch modulation changes when aftertouch is used Li Settings 0 127 E FMod Filter Modulation Depth Set the amount b
279. the cursor Then use Knob 1 or the DATA knob and DEC NO and INC YES keys to enter the new file name The procedure for renaming files is basically the same as for renaming Voices However you cannot use symbols or lower case characters and the name can only be up to eight characters in length Details about renaming Voices are given on Page 65 Press the ENTER key to rename the file The message Completed will be displayed after it has been renamed and you will be returned to the previous screen Files are named according to the MS DOS naming convention If the file name contains spaces and other characters unrecognized in MS DOS these characters will automatically be replaced by _ underscore characters when saving You can delete files saved on Memory Card File UWOICEBIR SUBDIR 1 METCHEWFILE S28 o Tye e ard File Type File Number File Name E Type File Type LI Settings all all data all vioce chain Sequence Chain plugin other To delete a directory delete any files within that directory and then delete the directory itself Details about File Types are given on Page 136 Use Knob B to select the File Type and Knob C to select the File Number When you press the ENTER key you will see a confirmation message Press the INC YES key to delete the file The message Completed will be displayed after it has been deleted and you will be returned
280. tive part parameter for the tempo Then use the appropriate knob to select MIDI midi Now the tempo of the Plug in Board is synchronized with the MIDI clock signal received from the S30 To synchronize with an external MIDI clock source enter Utility Mode and set the Sync parameter of the MIDI Other screen to MIDI 134 Utility Job Mode In Utility Job Mode you can restore your synthesizer s factory default settings Factory Set There is only one screen in this Mode Factory Set Restore Factory Defaults You can restore the synthesizer s default Internal Voices and Performances as well as its System and other settings Once you edit any settings their factory defaults will be overwritten and lost You can restore the factory default settings as follows AN When you restore the factory default settings all the current settings for the all the Internal Voices and Performances will be overwritten with the factory defaults Make sure you are not overwriting any important data You should back up any important data to Memory Card or to some external device beforehand Press the JOB key in Utility Mode You will see the Factory Set screen MODE VOICE PERFORM STORE O C L SEQ OUTILITY OCARD OPEN LJ COLO PLAY OEDIT JOB STOP COMPARE UTIL Factory Seto Job When you press the ENTER key you will see a confirmation message Press the INC YES key to execute the Facto
281. trol Change messages when used regardless of their Control Set allocations within the synthesizer For example the Pitch Bend Wheel Modulation Wheel and keyboard aftertouch were originally designed to control pitch bend modulation and aftertouch Therefore when you use these controllers pitch bend modulation and aftertouch information is always sent to the MIDI Out Let s say the Pan parameter is assigned to the Pitch Bend Wheel in a Control Set Now when you move the Pitch Bend Wheel the internal tone generator of the synthesizer will pan the sound but at the same time the original pre defined Pitch Bend messages will still be sent to the MIDI Out MIDI OUT IN Pitch Bend eel Hl Tone Generator The controllers can also send MIDI Control Change messages to control the parameters of external MIDI devices These assignments are found in the VOICE Vce CTRL Assign1 2 screen of Utility Mode As Pitch Bend Wheel Modulation Wheel and keyboard aftertouch is pre defined with specific MIDI controls you cannot assign MIDI Control Changes You can also set up a controller such that it sends one kind of Control message to the synthesizer s internal tone generator yet another kind to the MIDI Out For example in a Control Set you could assign resonance to Assignable Knob 1 Then in the VOICE CTRL Assign2 screen of Utility Mode you could assign Control Change Number 1 Modulation to the same knob Now w
282. ts These control assignments are called Control Sets You can assign up to six different Control Sets per Voice Thus there are six screens each for a separate controller CTL Set1 to CTL Set6 EL Sw 1234 CTLBSet1 3 Src Dest Der th C 1234 FEr 4 ELFOSed 63 Control Set 1 6 Element Controller Keys Modulation Wheel Knobs etc E Src Source Set the Controller used to control the function chosen in Dest The following nine controllers are available I Settings PB Pitch Bend Wheel MW Modulation Wheel AT Aftertouch FC Foot Controller FS Foot Switch RB Ribbon Controller BC Breath Controller KN1 2 Knobs 1 2 If SRC has been set to FC or FS you cannot control the function assigned to Dest if you have set the following Control Change numbers FC 7 11 FS 64 65 66 Control Change numbers can be set at the following screens FC CTRL Assign2 screen in Utility Mode Page 133 when playing a Voice CTRL Assign2 screen in Performance Edit Mode Page 111 when playing a Performance FS CTRL Other screen in Utility Mode Page 129 Voice Mode spow DN E Dest Destination Set the parameter to be controlled by the Control Set in Srce Settings see the separate Controls list E ElemSw Element Switch Select whether the Controller will affect each individual Element Move the cursor blinking using Knob 1 and use the DATA knob or the INC YES
283. types of filters but its basic idea is similar As illustrated below the filter is used to pass overtones at specific frequencies and cut off does not pass others to alter the harmonic factor of an original waveform You can determine such frequencies by specifying a pointing or center frequency cutoff frequency With some filters you can adjust signal levels at several frequency bands You can also set the Filter Envelope Generator FEG for time variance of how the filter works which results in a dynamic change in tonal characteristics Here we introduce how FEG works Level Cutoff range Range passed Cutoff range l Center frequency Details about Filter Types are given on Page 78 e FEG Filter Envelope Generator Using the FEG you can control the transition in tone from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the point at which it is released As illustrated below the Filter Envelope consists of five Time transition speed parameters and five Level parameters for the amount of filtering When you press a note on the keyboard the cutoff frequency will change according to these envelope settings This is useful for creating automatic wah effects for example Furthermore different FEG parameters can be set for each Element FEGETimes Hold Attack Decayl Decayz ELiI234 127 127 127 Lc Attack Decayi Sustain Release Level Level Level Key off Level Level Hold Level Time 0
284. u are free to assign parameters to suit the kind of sound being played These controller assignments are known as Control Sets As the following illustration shows you can assign up to six different Control Sets per Voice Within each Control Set the controller is known as the Source Src and the parameter controlled by the Source is known as the Destination Dest There are various Dest parameters available some will apply to the Voice as a whole while some will be specific to each of its Elements Details are given in the Controls List of the separate Data List Details about the available Dest parameter settings are given in the Destination Parameter List of the separate Data List Voice Control Sets Src Source 1 6 Controller PB MW etc Dest Destination Control Parameters Depth Depth of control ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF come D 1 G G The Element Switches Page 70 will be disabled if the Dest parameter setting is not specific for Elements i e for settings 00 to 33 By creating Control Sets you can change sounds in a variety of ways For example set the Sre Source parameter of Control Set 1 to MW Modulation Wheel and the Dest Destination parameter to ELFO PM Element LFO Pitch Modulation Depth Then set the Src parameter of Control Set 2 also to MW but set the Dest parameter to ELM PAN Element Pan You will also need to specify the Element to be controlled and also the depth amo
285. u play the keyboard The Vel parameter is only available if you select the fixed Velocity Curve Settings 1 127 Only available if Vel is set to fixed MSTR EF Bypass Master Effect By pass Set the parameters related to the EF BYPASS key on the front panel HSTE EF Burass Insert Reverb Chorus Sys of OFT E Insert Insertion Reverb Chorus When the EF BYPASS key is pressed its LED is lit various effects can be bypassed I Settings off on for Insert Insertion Reverb and Chorus effects Plug in Board Variations Variation Effects will be bypassed according to the Insert setting MSTR Other Other Setup Set other parameters common throughout the system Ctrl BCCurwe ASTE Others FPowerOnhlode Sys j hold LAr Woicet IHT E PowerOnMode Select the Mode entered when you switch the synthesizer on L Settings Performance Performance Play Mode is entered and the first Program Number INT 001 is selected automatically Voice INT Voice Play Mode is entered and the first Program Number of the Internal Memory INT 001 is selected automatically Quick Access Voice Play Mode is entered with Quick Access enabled and the first Program Number A PIANO is auttomatically selected last The Voice Performance Program selected before you switched the power off is recalled E Ctrl Controller Select whether or not the controller Modulation Wheel Aftertouch Foot Controll
286. unds that can be played over the range of the keyboard Drum Voices are mainly percussion drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes on the keyboard A collection of Drum Voice assignments is known as a Drum Kit If you have installed an optional Plug in Board there will be more Voices for you to choose from These Voices are known as Plug in Voices and will vary depending on the Plug in Board you have installed Page 27 The Note Limit settings Page 75 will also affect the allocation of sounds But basically Normal Voices of up to four Elements are playable across the whole keyboard range whereas with Drum Voices any of 73 different Waves can be assigned to each Drum Key on the keyboard Drum Voice Voice Element 1 4 wave 1 wave2 wave3 wave4 wave 5 wave 73 A total of eight Drum Voices DR1 to DR8 are available as presets You can also create your own Drum Voices and save them to internal User memory or to external memoly Memory Card just as with Normal Voices 32 Waves Waves are waveforms used as Elements that make up a Voice 553 high quality preset Waves are available As shown in the following illustration when creating a Voice you can select the Wave to be used as an Element and then set its level pitch tone and other parameters wave 1 553 Elementi Element2 e Element3 pei Eeen C 2 G8 33 A Performance consists of up to 17 Parts each of which can a Norma
287. unt of control In this example when you move the Modulation Wheel upward the amount of Pitch Modulation increases accordingly the Element is panned from left to right So in other words you can assign several Dest parameters to each Src controller SET 1 SET 2 MW MW Modulation Wheel ELFO PM ELM PAN Continuing from the example above now create another Control Set where Src is set to FC Foot Controller and Dest is set to ELFO PM Element LFO Pitch Modulation Depth Again specify the Element to be controlled and also the depth of control Modulation Wheel Moving the Modulation Wheel changes the amount of Pitch Modulation plus the pan position Now Pitch Modulation is assigned to both the Modulation Wheel and Foot Controller In other words you can also assign several Src controllers to each Dest parameter SET 1 Src MW Modulation Wheel SET 3 Sic FC Foot Controller You can control the pitch modulation effect using either of Modulation Wheel g vy MW and Foot Controller FC ELFO PM ELFO PM By assigning all six Control Sets you will have a stunning degree of real time control over the synthesizer s sounds Control Sets and External MIDI Control In a Control Set the controllers are assigned to the internal parameters of the synthesizer However some controllers were originally designed for a particular purpose and send pre defined MIDI Con
288. urrently selected Part on or off This parameter is not available for Multi Plug in Parts Li Settings off on E Layer Layer switch When switched on you can layer up to four Parts This parameter in not available for Multi Plug in Parts L Settings off on You can also set the overall output level and stereo pan position of the Layer when this is switched on Page 104 Layers may be slow to sound depending on their component Parts If you turn five or more Layer Switches on only four Parts are enabled for the layer These four Parts are determined in the priority of PartO1 to Part16 PartPL For disabled Parts their Layer switch values will be shown in brackets like on E RcvCh MIDI Receive Channel Set the MIDI Receive Channel for each Part Select off for Parts that you do not want to respond to MIDI Li Settings 1 16 off LYR Limit Layer Limit You can set note ranges and velocity limits for each Part LYRGLimits Hote Limit Wel Limit Partel D 2 68 1 12r E Note Limit Set the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified range I Settings C 2 G8 for the lowest and highest notes If you specify the highest note first and the lowest note second for example C5 to C4 then the note range covered will be C 2 to C4 and C5 to G8 You can set the lowest and highest notes in the
289. ven if you exit to Voice Play Mode the edited settings for the current Voice will not be lost so long as you do not select another Voice The B indicator will also be displayed in Voice Play Mode and if any Assignable knobs are used The Compare Function Use this to listen to the difference between the Voice with your edited settings and the same Voice prior to editing Press the COMPARE EDIT key while in Voice Edit Mode The G indicator at the top left of the screen will change to the M indicator and the Voice settings prior to editing will temporarily be reinstated for comparison purposes Compare indicator GENBWames CLory While the Compare function is enabled editing will not be possible using knobs A to C or knob 1 2 Press the EDIT key again to disable the Compare function and restore the settings for your edited Voice The ELEMENT ON OFF Function Use this to mute individual Elements within a Voice For example you could mute all Elements other than that which you are editing Thus you can hear how the edited settings affect just that Element Details are given on Page 46 64 Voice Store The edited settings for the current Voice will be lost if you select another Voice or Mode To avoid losing important data you should always use Voice Store to store your edited Voice Details about the Voice Store procedure are given on Page 101 Details about the Ed
290. verb EFF Cho Chorus hnseEF Farti6 rartPL EFFEF art gt Commor E InsEF Insertion Effect Assign a Part to an Insertion Effect Select off if you do not wish to assign the Part to an Insertion Effect Furthermore if Plug in Board have been installed they will also be selectable as a Plug in Part L Settings normal Part PartOl Part16 off Plug in Part if installed PartPL Plug in Part off EFF Rev Reverb You can select the Reverb Effect Type and set its parameters by pressing the ENTER key EFFGRew Tyre Return CEHTERI Common Basement 12r to Edit E Type Reverb Effect Type Set the Reverb Effect Type Li Settings Details are given in the Effect Types list of the separate Data List E Return Set the Return level of the Reverb Effect Li Settings 0 127 EFF Cho Chorus You can select the Chorus Effect Type and set its parameters by pressing the ENTER key EFFECho Tyre token Common Chorus i lr Return CEHTERI 1277 to Edit E Type Chorus Effect Type Set the Chorus Effect Type Li Settings Details are given in the Effect Types list of the separate Data List E toRev To Reverb Set the Send level of the signal sent from the Chorus Effect to the Reverb Effect Li Settings 0 127 E Return Set the Return level of the Chorus Effect Li Settings 0 127 If an Insertion Effect Plug in Board has been installed you will see the EFF Plg Plug in screen foll
291. volume for Zone 1 pan for Zone 2 etc You can make such assignments in the MKB Assign screen Page 122 in Performance Edit Mode VOLUME CONTROL SLIDER gt S NA gt AUTOT Performance Mode lets you use your synthesizer as a multitimbral tone generator for use with computer based music software or external sequencers If each track in a song file uses a different MIDI channel then the Parts in a Performance can be each assigned to those MIDI channels correspondingly Therefore you can play back a song file on an external sequencer and have different Voices playing on different tracks simultaneously In the following example we will create a Performance suited to playing back a song file consisting of three Parts piano bass and drums The piano track is assigned to MIDI channel 2 the bass track to channel 3 and the drums to channel 10 Song File Performance Track Bass Terni Track 8 Drums aremt Gh i0h p Sequence Tone generator player section Computer sequencer software 30 The synthesizer s internal sequencer can be used to play back the song file The included XGworks lite computer sequencer software can also be used for this though you need to make sure that the computer has been connec
292. was received at once af MIDI data error Error occurred when receiving MIDI data af MIDI checksum error Error occurred when receiving bulk data 2 Change internal battery Internal backup battery needs to be replaced af Card full No more available memory on the Memory Card af File not found Can t find the specified type of file af Bad card Memory Card is faulty af Card not ready Memory Card has not been inserted or an incompatible card 5V type has been inserted af Card unformatted Memory Card has not been formatted af Card write Protected Memory Card is write protected af Tlledal card Memory Card has been wrongly formatted af File already exists File with the same name already exists lt lt Illegal file Data in the file is corrupted and cannot be used af Tllegal file name The specified file name is not in MS DOS format af Read only file File is a read only type and cannot be deleted renamed or saved af Can t make EXT file A file could not be created on the Memory Card af Can t make directory No further directories can be created af Too deer directory Directory cannot be entered because it is too deep af Unknown File format File format is not recognized af Bulk Protected Bulk data cannot be received because protection is enabled af Dev
293. y Name Voice Name GEHGHame Ctar a 2 4 7 Cursibr C 1234 Pf Init Voice SHIFT PAGE A B c 1 2 DATA e PART ELEMENT Choose alphabetic Move the cursor characters position Choose Choose numeric a Category characters and symbols Setting the Voice Name Use Knob 2 to move the cursor to the position of the first character The selected character will blink Use Knob C to enter an alphabetic character or Knob 1 to enter a numeric character symbol Use Knob 2 to move the cursor to the position of the next character Repeat Steps and until all the characters have been set for your Voice Name You can also use the INC YES and DEC NO keys or the DATA knob to enter alphabetic and numeric characters as well as symbols Use Knob B to set the Category Name if necessary By setting the Category Name it will be easier to identify the Voice later The Category Search function Page 62 can also be used to search for it If you do not wish to set a Category Name the Category will be shown as two hyphens Settings for alphabetic and numeric characters and Category Names alb cidie fig hli j k 1 m njo p iq r s tut v iw x y z A B C D E F G H I J K L MINO P QIRIS T ULV W X Z 0 1 213 4 51671819 I lS ikl D L L Ti l lt t gt 7I i TFA Unassigned Synth Pad Piano Synth Sound Effects Chromatic Percussion Ethnic Organ Percussive Guitar Sound Effects Bass Drums
294. y are also tone generators in their own right and extend the system level specifications such as maximum polyphony You can play Plug in Voices just like ordinary internal Voices and use them as Parts in a Performance Page 93 This synthesizer is compatible with the Modular Synthesis Plug in System see next page There are three types of Modular Synthesis Plug in System compatible Plug in Boards Single Part Multi Part and Effect Plug in Board By adding one of the following types of Plug in Boards to your S30 you can build your own system based on the sounds you require The PLG100 VH Effect Plug in Board cannot be used with the S30 e Analog Physical Modeling Plug in Board PLG150 AN Using Analog Physical Modeling AN synthesis the very latest digital technology is used to accurately reproduce the sound of analog synthesizers With this board installed you have real time control over the playback of vintage synthesizer sounds as well as the very latest sounds heard in today s club oriented music e Piano Plug in Board PLG150 PF A massive 16MB of waveform memory is dedicated to the reproduction of piano sounds using AW M2 synthesis This board offers 136 stereo sounds including a number of acoustic and electric pianos and up to 64 note polyphony 27 e Advanced DX TX Plug in Board PLG150 DX The sounds of the DX7 are available on this Plug in Board Unlike with PCM based solutions this does not use sampled waveforms Inste
295. y the Gain setting Ll Settings 500Hz 16kHz E O Frequency Characteristic This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics Li Settings 0 1 12 0 You can assign MIDI Control Change Numbers to the controllers and front panel knobs For example Knob 1 2 can be set to control the amount of effect applied to a sound and the Foot Controller can be set to control modulation These Control Change Number assignments are known as Controller Assign The following two screens are available CTRL Assign1 Controller Assign 1 CTRL Assign2 Controller Assign 2 CTRL Assign Controller Assign 1 Use Knobs C 1 and 2 to assign Control Change Numbers to the Breath Controller Knob 1 and Knob 2 respectively The selected Control Change Name is shown on the left of the display CTRL Assi9ni3 BC Enoki Enobz Ioe CFootCtrl J Hz 16 ir Control Control Change Name Change Number E BC Breath Controller Specify a Control Change Number for this Assignable Controller When MIDI information for this Assignable Controller is received the specified Control Change is applied I Settings 00 95 see the separate Data List for details E Knob1 2 Knob 1 2 Assign Control Change Numbers to Knobs 1 and 2 on the front panel I Settings 00 95 see the separate Data List for details CTRL Assign2 Controller Assign 2 Use Knobs C and 1 to assign
296. y way of example you could set the Levels Offsets and Break Points BP1 to 4 as follows AMPEScales BFI BRP BPS BF4 EL1234 E 1 B z G 4 A 5 AMFPEScales0fsetl Offset Ofsts Ofst4 EL1I234 4 1 17 4 Here the current amplitude is 80 The Offsets are 4 at BP1 set to note E1 10 at BP2 set to note B2 17 at BP3 set to note G4 and 4 at BP4 set to A5 That is the amplitudes at each Break Point are 76 90 97 and 84 respectively For other notes the amplitudes will be on the straight line connecting the two adjacent Break Points The Break Points are automatically arranged in ascending order across the keyboard For example BP2 cannot be set to a lower note than that of BP1 85 The Break Point Levels are Offsets used to increase or decrease the current amplitude at the specified notes Regardless of the size of these Offsets the minimum and maximum amplitude limits values of 0 and 127 respectively cannot be breached A note set below the BP1 will become the BP1 Level A note set above BP4 will become the BP4 Level Voice Mode There are various settings for the LFO The LFO is used to generate low frequency signals and can be used to create vibrato wah tremolo etc effects when applied to pitch filter amplitude parameters Different LFO parameters can be set for each Element The following two screens are available LFO Wave LFO Depth LFO Wave You can set various parameters controlling the LFO
297. y which the filter Cutoff frequency changes when aftertouch is used Li Settings 0 127 120 E AMod Amplitude Modulation Depth Set the amount by which the amplitude modulation changes when aftertouch is used Li Settings 0 127 CTL AC Control AC Control Depth Multi Plug in Parts only Control Changes Assignable Controllers can be used to control the filter amplitude parameters for each Multi Plug in Part 17 to 32 Filter 63 Are CTLBGAC Control Source tir 63 Far H4CFootCir J E Source Set the MIDI Control Change number used to control the Filter Amp parameters Ll Settings off 1 95 E Filter Set the amount by which the filter Cutoff frequency changes when the controller Source is used Li Settings 64 63 E Amp Set the amount by which the output level amplitude changes when the controller Source is used Li Settings 64 63 CTL AC Modulation ac Modulation Control Changes Assignable Controllers can be used to control the amount of pitch filter amplitude applied to each Multi Plug in Part 17 to 32 CTLGAC Modulation FPMoad F Parti 127 eT hd Aog lr E PMod Pitch Modulation Depth Set the amount by which the pitch modulation changes when the controller Source is used Li Settings 0 127 E FMod Filter Modulation Depth Set the amount by which the filter Cutoff frequency changes when the controller Source is used Li Settings 0
298. you set the MIDI Transmit Channel by turning Knob A and holding down the SHIFT key The settings for Voice Play Mode are transmitted on this MIDI channel The MIDI Transmit Channel can also be set in the MIDI Ch screen of Utility Mode Page 130 Voice Program Selection There are four ways in which you can choose a Voice e Using the BANK PROGRAM keys e Using the DEC NO and INC YES keys e Using the DATA knob e Using the Category Search Press a MEMORY key to select a Voice Memory The Voice Memory indicator in the LCD will blink PRE1 PRE 2 INT EXT PLG DRUM DRUM E l7 7 WCE ee PREL 128 H16 0Pf GrandPianc EG Lo EQ Mid EQ Hi Cutoff ReyvTime Details about Voice Memories are given on Pages 22 31 Press a BANK key A to H to select a Bank The Bank indicator in the LCD will blink jCif IL DRUM DRUM RE1 al QUICK ACCESS G H A PIANO E PIANO ORGAN GTR BASS_ STRINGS BRASS SYNTH OTHER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DOUUVUUVL 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 LICLICICICICICILI MI SUL aoe fe PRE1 128 H163 CPF GrandFiano EQ Mid EQ Hi Cutoff ReyvTime If you press the EXIT key here the Voice selection process is canceled and the original Voice is reinstated If the Bank has already been selected this step is not required Details about Banks are given on Pages 22 31 Press a PROGRAM key 1 to 16 to select a Program Number Voices can be selected by setting the Memory Bank and Prog

Yamaha S30 Musical Instrument User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents